JP2020127457A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing game interest from becoming lost.SOLUTION: Performance control means: can execute a main variable display game on the basis of entering of a game ball into a main region; can execute a sub variable display game on the basis of entering of a game ball into a sub region; can place both the main variable display game and the sub variable display game in an executing state; when the sub variable display game shows a first special result, terminates the main variable display game with the main variable display game showing a specific result, and executes a switching performance for displaying, on the display device, the specific result of the main variable display game and the first special result of the sub variable display game in a switched manner; and does not execute a blessing performance for notification that the first special game state is blessed, which is generated when the first special result is shown by the sub variable display game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 155

Description

The present invention includes effect control means capable of displaying on a display device a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting area or the second starting area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a display game result is a special result.

Conventionally, a first starting area is a main starting area (main area) in which entry of a game ball is recommended, and a second starting area is a sub starting area (sub area) in a first gaming state (for example, left-handed state). ), and the second starting area becomes the main starting area in which the entry of the game ball is recommended, and the first starting area becomes the sub starting area, and the second game state (for example, right-handed state) can be generated. A gaming machine exists (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-148127, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the special game state (small hit state or big hit state) occurs due to the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area, If a special game state (a small hit state or a big hit state) occurs in the sub variable display game based on a ball entry, the interest of the game may be reduced if the same effect is performed.

An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a production control capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed on a display device based on the entry of a game ball into a first starting area or a second starting area. In a gaming machine that is provided with means and is capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, it is recommended that a game ball enter the first starting area. While the first starting area is the main area, and the second starting area is the sub-area, the first game state and the entry of the game ball into the second starting area is recommended, and the second starting area is It is possible to generate a second game state in which the first starting area becomes a sub area as well as a main area, and the effect control means displays a main variation based on the entry of a game ball into the main area. A state in which the game can be executed, the sub variable display game can be executed based on the entry of a game ball into the sub region, and the main variable display game and the sub variable display game are both being executed. It is possible to
When the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result, the main variable display game is ended and the main variable display game is set as the specific result, and the specific result of the main variable display game and the sub variable display are set. Occurrence of a first special game state that occurs when the result of the slave variable display game becomes the first special result by executing a switching effect in which the first special result of the game is switched and displayed on the display device. Do not perform a blessing effect to bless and inform.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of various display parts of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of a special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is another figure which shows the lighting mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game control device. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of checksum calculation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of switch reading processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. 6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 1. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fraud & winning a prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of a prize number counter update processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of production command setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is another time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is still another time chart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting mouth 1 switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting opening 2 switch processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the outfall probability. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing of 2 bytes. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 transition process shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 change process shift setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during a special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 1 in-display process transfer setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the processing during a special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special movement 1 small hit fanfare inside processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit fanfare inside process transfer setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 1 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing 2 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during the opening of the special winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of design fluctuation control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet irregularity monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the board electric wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of external information edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of starting opening 1 signal edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of a symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 game process. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing during a change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 big hit termination process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 big hit ending process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 1 small hit completion process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a special figure 2 small hit termination process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the first half of single command system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the latter half of single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change interruption setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation restart setting process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of change suspension setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation restart setting process. 11 is a time chart (timing chart) showing how the variable display game is forcibly terminated. 9 is a time chart showing how the variable display game is interrupted/restarted. (A) It is a time chart which shows the case where the variation time timer of the special figure 2 variable display game is updated when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. (B) It is a time chart which shows the case where it is not updated. (A) is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of the special display 1 variable display game is not set. (B) is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) that delays the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. (A) is a time chart showing how the delay timer (wait time) of the special figure 2 variable display game is set regardless of the state of variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game. (B) is a time chart showing how a delay timer (wait time) for delaying restart of the variable display game is not set. It is a time chart which shows processing when there is a possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will end at the same timing. It is a time chart showing an example of a process when a power failure occurs during the interruption of the variable display game and the power failure is restored (power on) thereafter. It is a time chart which shows another example of the processing when there is a power failure during the interruption of the variable display game and then the power failure is restored (power on). It is a front view of a game board provided in the game machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the lamp display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the collective display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of various display parts which comprise the collective display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the timer interruption processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the outfall probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of high probability variation frequency update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the number of times of time saving change update processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit termination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flow chart which shows the modification of the special map 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a 2nd flow chart which shows the modification of the special map 2 big hit end processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of general-purpose game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in the figure. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric power operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal electric ball remaining process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a time chart of the operation of the first special variation winning device in the small hit RUSH. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect for the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game with respect to the normal game state (left hit state). In the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect with respect to the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game with respect to the small hit RUSH state (right hitting state). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure starting opening 2 switch processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 usual processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the change start information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition diagram (first half) which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is a figure which shows the case where a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur in a normal game state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is an example of the screen transition diagram (the latter half) which showed the display screen of the display device in time series, and is a figure which shows the case where a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur in a normal game state. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows example 1 of another with a small irregular hit. It is a figure which shows example 2 of another of an irregular small hit in 3rd Embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows example 3 (switching effect 1) of irregular small hit. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows example 4 (switching production 2) of irregular small hit. Regarding the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (first half) showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and a normal small hit and an irregular small hit in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state). It is a figure which shows the case where it occurs. Regarding the third embodiment, it is an example of a screen transition diagram (second half) showing the display screen of the display device in a time series, and in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state), a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur. It is a figure which shows the case where it occurs. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing concerning the modification of a 3rd embodiment. In the modified example of the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect with respect to the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game with respect to the normal game state (left hit state). In the modified example of the third embodiment, it is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect for the hit of the main variable display game or the sub variable display game for the small hit RUSH state (right hitting state). FIG. 16 is an example of a screen transition diagram (first half) showing the display screens of the display device in time series in the modification of the third embodiment.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged at the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to a game state
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided that extends in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side). Projection production unit 1
3 is a production device for performing a light emission production or the like according to the progress state of the game. Projection production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state means, for example, a specific game state (time saving state) or a special result (in a variable display game).
For example, it is a state (probability change state, probability variation state) with a high probability of occurrence of a big hit), a big hit state (special game state), and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variation state is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability falling lottery. There are things that continue until you are won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided and specified. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device has a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 8 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. And a lower plate 23 are provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device is the force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area.
It is possible to change the launch force corresponding to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and to launch the game ball in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
With 0a. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30a is
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the. The gaming machine 10,
The game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball shooting device to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window serving as a display area of a variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a production display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
There is provided a warp passage 40a for guiding inside and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the stage portion 40b
The game ball rolled on b is easy to win in the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 8) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 8).

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is achieved by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning openings 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 7).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first starting winning opening (first starting winning area, special drawing 1 starting opening, starting opening 1) 36 for giving a starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure variation display game 36. Is provided. At the time of left hitting (normal hitting), the game ball easily wins (wins) in the first start winning opening 36. In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second starting winning area, special figure 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided. When hitting to the right, the game ball becomes easier to win (ball) in the second starting winning opening 37. The game ball is the first start winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 3
When 7 is won, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

In the game area 32 below the second starting winning opening 37, the lower large winning opening is opened by rotating the upper end side toward the front side by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variation winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower special winning opening, a lower special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 7) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

Further, in the game area 32 on the upper left of the center case 40, the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b
A second special variable winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an attacker-type opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper special winning opening by rotating the upper end in the direction of falling toward the front by (see FIG. 7) is provided. ing. Like the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39 is in a state in which the special winning opening is closed according to the result of the special figure variation display game (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player).
To a release state (a game state that is advantageous to the player) and facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening, thereby giving the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). ing. In addition, inside the upper special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (see FIG. 7) (two in the present embodiment) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

General winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, first special variable winning device 3
When a game ball wins the lower special winning opening of 8 and the upper special winning opening of the second special variation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 7) determines the number of prizes according to the type of the winning opening. The balls are discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the first special variation winning device 38, there is provided an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize.

Further, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 game), special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 game)
A collective display device 50 for executing the above) is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units D1 to D20 that display information such as the current game state (see FIG. 3).

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 is a first special view variable display section 51 for a variable display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
(Special figure 1 indicator) (lamp D1) and second special figure variation display section 52 (special figure 2 indicator) (lamp D2). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display portion 53 (lamps D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variation display. The memory display unit 54 (for informing the number of stored (held) memories of the game
Toku-zu 1 hold indicator) (lamps D11-D14).

Further, on the collective display device 50, a first game state display unit 55 (first game state display unit, probability state display unit) (lamp D15-) that indicates that the winning probability state is a high probability state.
D18), the second gaming state display unit 56 (second gaming state indicator) (lamps D8-D10) that lights up when a big hit or a small hit occurs and notifies that it is right-handed (when it should be right-handed) Is provided. In addition, the collective display device 50 corresponds to a modification described later, and a third game state display unit 57 (third game state display unit 57 (third game) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended.
It may have a game status indicator and an interruption status indicator (lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of various display units 53-57 (lamps D3-D20) that form the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 displays the state of the gaming machine corresponding to the lighting mode of the various display units 53-57. The round display unit 53 (lamps D3 to D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the storage display unit 54 (lamps D11 to D14) is lit according to the number of holdings (starting storage number). The first gaming state display section 55 (lamps D15-D18) lights up in a high probability state and turns off in a low probability state, and the second gaming state display section 56 (lamps D8-D10) lights up when hitting to the right, Turns off when left-handed (normal).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the special figure variation display game will be described.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the general-purpose starting gate is not provided, and the so-called general-purpose variable display game is not executed. The second starting winning opening 37 is not provided with a movable member that opens and closes the second starting winning opening 37.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 3
5, the first start winning hole 36, the second starting winning hole 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or to the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 It flows in and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, the type of the winning opening won. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 through the payout device.

As a basic way of playing, in the normal game state, the player makes a left-hand hit and puts a game ball into the first start winning opening 36 to start the special figure 1 variable display game, such as a small hit/big hit or a probability change state. Due to the occurrence of, the player switches to right hitting and aims at the second starting winning opening 37 and the special winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction for instructing whether the player should hit left or right, and when the player does not follow the instruction, the display device 41 and the speaker 19a.
, 19b can notify the error.

The winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 7) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 7). The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment), and the second starting winning opening. The game balls that win the prize 37 are detected as the starting prize balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit (1 in the present embodiment).

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure reservation storage area (part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure start winning memory (special figure starting memory) for a predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the maximum value). It is stored up to 4 times. The storage number of the special figure 1 starting prize winning memory (special figure 1 starting memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for informing the number of starting winning prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game can be in the execution state (running) at the same time independently of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 starting prize during the display game execution or the big hit is invalidated (the detection of the starting opening 2 switch 37a is invalidated). Accordingly, the special figure 2 starting prize memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is not substantially accumulated, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started immediately when the special figure 2 starting prize memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not being played at the timing when the game ball has won the second start winning opening 37, the variation start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game
Is established. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 starting prize storage number is not displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41. It should be noted that it is also possible to have a configuration in which the special figure 2 starting prize winning memory number is displayed on the collective display device 50 or the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 or the second starting memory. To do.

In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, identification information (special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), special symbol 2 (special symbol 2)) is displayed on the special symbol 1 indicator 51 and the special symbol 2 indicator 52. Is variably displayed and then a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed independently (at the same time) simultaneously (both), but one special figure variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. When it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped by the outlier result.

In the normal game state, when a game ball is won in the second start winning hole 37 by right-handing,
Special figure 2 The fluctuation display game starts fluctuation, but basically it changes for a long time (long fluctuation, eg 10 minutes)
Therefore, during this period, a big hit or a small hit that occurs in the special display 1 variable display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped.

FIG. 5: is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the 7 segment type indicator (lamp D1) which comprises the special figure 1 indicator 51. As shown in FIG. The special figure 1 variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the dot portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 1 display device 51. The special display 1 variation display game stop display as a result of the deviation (missing pattern, deviation display) is a display in which the central segment and the dot portion are lit. Special Figure 1 Variable display Game big hit result stop display (
The jackpot pattern, jackpot display), there can be a plurality of displays (symbols) corresponding to the number of rounds (R) of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot (normal state or probability variation state). There are multiple types of stop display (small hit pattern, small hit display) of the small hit result of the special display 1 variable display game, but the opening pattern (open time etc.) of the big winning opening due to the small hit is the same one type ( Special figure 1 small hit) only.

In the present embodiment, in all types of jackpots, the probability variation state is a predetermined number of times after the jackpot is finished (
It continues until the variable display game is executed 50 times, for example. That is, the gaming machine is an ST (special time) machine, and the big hit symbols are only probability variation symbols.

FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B show a 7-segment type display (lamp D 1
It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of ). The special figure 2 variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (here, the central segment and the dot portion) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 2 display 52. Special figure 2 variable display The stop display of the result of the game disengagement (disappearance pattern, disengagement display)
This is a display in which the central segment is lit. Special figure 2 Variable display The stop display of the big hit result of the game (big hit design, big hit display) is the number of rounds of big hit (R) and the game state after the big hit ends
There can be a plurality of displays (designs) corresponding to the normal state or the probability change state). Special Figure 2 There are multiple types of stop display (small hit pattern, small hit display) of the small hit result of the variable display game,
There are 3 types of opening patterns (opening time, etc.)
). Also, in the special figure 2 small hits 1, 2 and 3, the big winning opening (upper big winning opening or lower big winning opening) may be different, and depending on the small hit design, the upper big winning opening or lower big winning opening Either of them will open in a predetermined opening pattern.

In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, for example, decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of numbers or the like are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling is started in a predetermined order, the changing symbols are stopped in sequence after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are displayed for the purpose of improving the interest.

When the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and/or the second special variation winning device 39 are activated by energizing the lower special winning opening solenoid (38b) and/or the upper special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 7). The special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or tens of seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player plays many game balls. The privilege of being able to acquire is given.

When the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display As a result of the game, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value)
Is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 and/or the second special variation winning device 39 are operated by energizing the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and/or the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 7). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less).

Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

The big hit is a special result involving the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result not involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. Variable prize device (first special variable prize device 38 and/or second
This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variation winning device 39) is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are configured as separate display devices, and both of the special figure variable display games may simultaneously be in the running state (running state). When a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (the special result or the specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly set to the off result. Stop.

Regarding the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, the decoration special figure variation display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may both be in the execution state (execution state) at the same time, When a big hit or a small hit occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and is stopped and displayed), the other decorative special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the off result.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a, 39a) uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Has been done. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine. Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111 CP.
The U unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are included in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , Game microcomputer 11
1 has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 for generating and outputting.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after being supplied to the built-in RAM) and during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 1
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 11 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. ROM111b or RAM11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal effect (N reach) and a special 1 reach (SP1 reach) are provided as a reach effect system in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different). , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining a big hit random number for determining a big hit in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for pattern random numbers, fluctuation patterns in special display variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. ..

Further, the CPU 111a executes the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure variation display game game result (big hit or miss), the special figure variation display game probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) as the current gaming state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 11
The reference numeral 1a constitutes a variation allocation information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball payout request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, and a second start winning opening 37. Start opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a, lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, upper special winning opening switch 3 of the second special variable winning device 39
9a, the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for receiving a negative logic signal such as V and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a and the upper winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Signals are input from the switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12, and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. The data bus 1 receives the overflow switch signal and the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24.
A first input port 122 is provided for supplying to the gaming microcomputer 111 via 40.
The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full).

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and the gaming microcomputer 1 via the data bus 140.
Taken in 11. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13 is also provided.
0 to each port. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. It should be noted that the reset signal RST corresponds to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine, which is an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that it is in the impossible state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-injection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-fire testing device.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a solenoid (lower special winning opening solenoid) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (upper large winning opening) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening/closing data of the solenoid 39b is provided.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON/OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signals of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and a fourth that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the collective display device 50
12V DC is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of FIG. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S3, and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth output of external information signal to external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. Photo coupler 13
9, the game microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 8
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program executed by the CPU (production control program).
And a program ROM 321, which is a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, an FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of a power failure, the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week) , RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a time measuring means for generating information indicating the time. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, and the sound source LSI 314.
To perform reproduction sound instruction, lighting of a decorative lamp, drive control of a motor or a solenoid, management of effect time, and the like.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
Through the 31, the decorative special figure reservation number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is received as an effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools each part of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

The start winning award (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b.
It is determined whether or not the variable display game is missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning opening 37, and based on the starting memory, the big hit determination disorder of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. Numerical values are extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to judge whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37). Make a means.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and also displays the special game state (big hit). State) is generated. In the process of generating the special game state, C
For example, the PU 111a opens the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b or opens the movable member 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 with the special winning opening solenoid 39b to enter the special winning opening. The control that enables the inflow of game balls is performed.

Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round is to open the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times, 8 times, 4 times or 2 times) control (cycle game) )I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the high probability state, the probability of a hit result (a big hit result in the present embodiment) in the special figure variation display game is the normal probability state (
It is a higher state than the low probability state). In addition, the high probability state is determined based on the result mode of either the special figure variable display game (first special figure variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). Even so, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special figure variation display game is controlled to be short. In the present embodiment, the high-probability state and the short-time state are configured to occur at the same time, but it is also possible to generate them independently and to generate only one of them.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 is mainly performed in a main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B and a predetermined time period (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment).
2 and timer interrupt processing. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing.
And an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing.

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 9A and 9B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flow chart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented by "A***" or "S***".

As shown in FIG. 9A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007).
By setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 20) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means.
0 or the waiting time for waiting until the program of the effect control device 300) starts normally (
For example, 3 seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122,
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the waiting time, the initialization switch 11
Operation 2 can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time elapses, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting the waiting time elapses, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus and checks the number of times (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

If the power failure monitoring signal is ON, the game control device 100 (the result of A1009 is "Y
)), it is determined whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 for determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks continues (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine. Wait until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "
N"), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1012). When the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”).
) That is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read/write memory (Read/Write Memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (no output). Set to (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 previously read whether the initialization switch is turned on (A1016).

When the initialization switch is off, the game control device 100 (the result of A1016 is "
N"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), R
It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the WM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "
Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 9B, and the process when the power is normally restored (recovered) is executed.

Further, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (A1).
If the result of 017 is “N” or the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1023 of FIG. 9B and initialization is performed. Execute the process. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A10).
21). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) that stores the status of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the status of the payout busy signal is changed. It is set to an undefined state indicating that it is not fixed.

And the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. The commands at the time of power failure recovery include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command indicating the number of special figure 1 held, a probability information command indicating the probability state, a command for screen designation, etc. ..
The command for designating the screen is a command for designating the display content of the display device 41. For example, in the case where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are normally processed (when they are neither changing nor hitting). Is the command for the customer waiting demo, and in other cases it is the command for the recovery screen.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery is the special command 1 as in the modification of FIGS. 82 to 89 described later.
If the variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (when there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in the RWM), the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended or the special figure 2 Suspended command indicating that the variable display game is suspended (suspended command)
May be included.

On the other hand, when executing the processing of step A1023 after executing steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibition area to access permission (A1023). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command for RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the process of step A1028. The commands at the time of RAM initialization include a model designation command, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command, and the like. RAM initialization command,
The production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization by the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b (for example, 30 seconds).

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and step A1
The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of 027 further includes an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode and a time saving number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state depending on the model.

The game control device 100 is a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
) The circuit is activated (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 11 based on the divided signal.
1a is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1028, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC in the random number generation circuit
The code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit is set in the update permission register (C).
It is performed by the PU 111a. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (the jackpot symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2)) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1030), and interruption is permitted (A1031). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit design random number, and the small hit design random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle.

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1.
It may be a random update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process of step A1032, the game control device 100 determines the power supply device 40.
The number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 is read through the port and the data bus and checked is set (A1033), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
34). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1034 is “N”), step A
The procedure returns to the initial value random number update processing of 1032. That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (A1031) before the initial value random number updating process (A1032), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being stressed by making the value random number update processing wait.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process of step A1032 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process also in the timer interrupt process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number updating processes are performed. In order to prevent the update process from being executed, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process. There is an advantage that it simplifies the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1034 is “Y”), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1033 (A1035). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (result of A1035 is “N”), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 once interrupts when the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1036), and OFF data is output to all output ports (A103).
7).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1038) and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (
A1039). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041).
). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the process stands by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the activation of the slave control device (a game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111c capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1040 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

The game control device 100 first sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and "0" is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and sets the number of repetitions to -1.
It is updated (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (A
1107).

If the checksum calculation is not completed (result of A1107 is “N”), the game control device 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number updating process is executed in step A1032 of the main process shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B.

The game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1201). Then, the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), and the initial value random number updating process ends.

Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit symbol Is.

As described above, the randomness of the random numbers can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, the input process of reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). further,
Based on the output data set in various processes, the solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 38b,
39b) and other output processing for performing drive control of the actuator and the like (A130).
4). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. ..

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1305), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1306), a random number update. Processing 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower special winning opening switch 38a, and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are monitored for whether or not there is a normal signal input, and for error monitoring. A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1308).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 has a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a.
Thus, the starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning in the starting opening is executed (A1309). Then, the special figure 1 game process for performing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1310).
), next, the special figure 2 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1).
311). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.
See below.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED edit process for driving the segment LEDs for displaying the special figure variation game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents. (A1312). The details of the segment LED editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet irregularity monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1313). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1314). The details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, for details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process, see FIG.
See below.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1315). Details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank designation is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning to the register bank 0 or the processing for returning to the register bank 0.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of input processing.

The game control device 100 first reads the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Then, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A14
04), prepare the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (A1405). continue,
Unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and further bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in the RWM or another memory.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A
1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A
1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A14
13) and the input process ends.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

The game control device 100 first reads the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is saved ( It is stored) (A1504). After that, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal taken in the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is saved ( It is stored) (A1509). After that, a deterministic bit pattern in which the bit with the same state is 1 and the bit with different state is 0 is created in the first and second readings (A1510), and the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 are ANDed to determine this time. Bit (A1511).

Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same state bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interruption The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previously held bit (A1513). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed.

Then, the game control device 100 combines the currently determined bit and the previously held bit, and saves the currently determined state (A1514). Furthermore, the exclusive OR of the last time and the confirmed state of this time is taken and saved as the rising edge (A1515). After that, the switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reads the switch once for each interrupt processing and compares it with the previous read result to change the signal. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but if it does so, it may not be possible to make a correct determination if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 7) that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the solenoid output port 13 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b
The data to be output to 4 is combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A
1607), and outputs the loaded data to the segment output port 135 (A160).
8).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the launch permission (A161).
0), and finally output the combined data to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (
A1611). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1612). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1613).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1614). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1615
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1616), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not been transmitted yet. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is classified according to the number of prize balls set for each prize hole (for example, 2 prize balls, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 13 prize balls, 14 prize balls). ) Is provided with a winning number counter area, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored.
This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control device 100, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, is the prize to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

The game control device 100, if there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (A170
The result of 1 is "N"), and the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (
A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the prize number counter areas is completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed, the game control device 100 (the result of A1703 is "
Y”), and the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701 and steps A1701 to A1703 are repeated.

Further, when there is a count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1701 is “Y”).
), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1704), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area as a new remaining number of prize balls (A1707). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before the process of step A1707, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). When it is not 0 or more (A1709)
Result of “N”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, when it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A17).
10), save the subtraction result in the remaining number of prize balls area (A1711), and further, step A170.
Return to the process of 8.

Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal comes to be output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, so It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.

If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A171).
2) It is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). When the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy status flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in the on state (
Busy state). That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The pay-out busy signal status (flag) is based on the state of the pay-out busy signal and the pay-out control device 200.
Is information that sets whether or not payout control can be started immediately, an idle state in which payout control can be started immediately, a busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, an indefinite state in which the state is indeterminate Is set.

When the payout busy signal status is busy, the game control device 100 (A1
When the result of 714 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the busy state is not set, the idle state and the undefined state are included. In this way, the payout control device 2
If 00 does not start the payout control immediately and does not send the payout command, by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the sending of the payout command, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing and reduce the control load. I try to reduce it.

The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process when the power is turned on. The indefinite state is set to the idle state or the busy state based on that the state of the payout busy signal is maintained for a predetermined period to a state indicating that the payout control can be immediately started or disabled. To resolve. In other words, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period without being transmitted. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

If the payout busy signal status is not busy, the game control device 100 (A1
The result of 714 is "N"), and it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, the number of counts which is not “0” is checked in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is.

Then, when there is no count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1715 is "N
)), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (A1716), and it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the prize number counter areas is completed (A17).
17). When all the checks are completed (result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmitting process is ended. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (A171
7 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and steps A1715 to A17
The processes up to 17 are repeated.

Further, if there is a count number, the game control device 100 (the result of A1715 is “Y”).
), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (A1718), and the payout command corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), the initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the gaming control device 100 outputs a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control, indicating that the payout control can be started. In the case shown, it constitutes prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs due to some cause, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in conventional gaming machines, a function for backing up is required,
There was a problem that it would lead to higher costs. According to the present embodiment, the payout control device 200
It is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing a function for backing up.

In addition, the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, so the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38. , Based on a prize control command transmitted from the game control device (game control device 100) and a game control device that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variation winning device 39),
A state in which the payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls is provided, and the game control means indicates whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start the payout control. A state indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control when a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means based on a signal (busy signal) and a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Even if the signal is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. Accordingly, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, in the game area 32, a winning area having a different number of prize balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning apparatus 38, second special variation winning apparatus 39) is provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) can specify, for each number of prize balls, whether or not the prize ball command for instructing the payout control of the game balls has not been transmitted (game control device 100). And the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The payout control means determines whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control before the award ball command counter determines whether or not there is an untransmitted prize ball command. I am going to do it.

In addition, the game control is carried out comprehensively, and a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second
Starting prize hole 37, general prize hole 35, first special variable prize device 38, second special variable prize device 3
9) Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of the game ball to 9)
) And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is output from the payout control means. Prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control can start the payout control (
External information for outputting a game control device 100) and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. Output means (game control device 100), and the external information output means, the state signal output from the payout control means, regardless of whether the payout control means can start the payout control Will be output.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period, and a prize ball command is issued. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). The ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , The first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39), the prize ball command is generated in units of one winning, and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command of the above to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize information is given in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. It is possible to memorize, and update the game ball in the predetermined prize area at the time of winning, and by updating in response to the transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means, the prize ball command that has not been transmitted. The external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the game balls into the predetermined prize area, and outputs the prize ball signal every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the prize ball signal counter can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and the prize of the game ball in the predetermined prize area. It is possible to store the number of prize balls that has not been subjected to the accumulation process by updating the data at the same time and updating it in correspondence with the accumulation process of the prize balls by the external information output means.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Random number update process 1
It is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number updating process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

Game control device 100, when the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (A1801)
Result of “N”), the processes of step A1804 and thereafter are executed. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (A
When the result of 1804 is “N”), the random number update process 1 ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (A1
The result of 804 is “Y”), and the small hitting symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A18).
05). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A18).
06), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number updating process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Random number update process 2
This is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of FIGS.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 is
Both are set as update targets, and the update targets are switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. further,
When the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the upper byte and the lower byte are updated at different interrupt times. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Is configured.

The game control device 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of this update processing (A1).
901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter in which a random value is set (A1904).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). Then, when the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (result of A1906 is “Y”), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the additional value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as "masked value") is set to a mask update value obtained by adding "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

Further, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (result of A1906 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” and the lower 1 byte as an additional value. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why "1" is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0" and the value does not change by adding "0".

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1
909). If it is a 2-byte random number (result of A1909 is “Y”), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, when the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”)
, "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, the value (1 byte) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

The game control device 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined by the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the new random number value, and whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired by the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

Then, the game control device 100, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (
The result of A1913 is “N”), and the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (result of A1913 is “Y”), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new random number value again (A1914), and The random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (
A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (result of A1916 is “N”), the random number updating process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "Y
)), a new random number value (if a new new random number value is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number (A1917), and the random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a uses the first
A variation pattern for determining the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game, out of various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting areas of the starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating a random number.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process is step A130 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.
8 is executed.

First, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper special winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the upper special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, despite the fact that the special winning opening is not open, it is monitored whether or not there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening, and the fraud & prize monitoring processing for detecting a normal winning is executed (A2002). Details of the fraud & winning award monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the fraud monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of the data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, the fraudulent The information on the winning number upper limit value (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), the winning port monitoring table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. Further, in the winning prize port monitoring table, information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter region 1 and the address of the winning number counter region 2 is defined. The fraud monitoring table and the winning hole monitoring table are prepared for each switch to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower special winning opening switch 38a in the lower special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (A2003). And
The fraud & prize monitoring process is performed to monitor fraudulent prizes and detect normal prizes (A2
004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) capable of always winning (A2005 ), the winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process (A2007).
In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the abnormal fluctuation number in the normal game state (at the time of low probability), and the abnormal fluctuation number is a prescribed value ( For example, when 5) is reached, the effect control device 300 is caused to perform error notification. Details of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time (A2008). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2010).
.. The details of the gaming machine state check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shooting ball running out error) based on the shoot ball running out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set up. The value of the status scan counter is 2
If the value is 3, the monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state (payout abnormal error) based on the payout abnormal status signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the illegal radio wave signal (frame illegal radio wave) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2013
Result of "N"), the winning a prize switch/state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (A2
The result of 013 is “Y”), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2014), and the gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error occurs (A2015) is executed.
..

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Note that the processing from steps A2014 to A2016 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
The processing from A2014 to A2016 is performed every 6 ms.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fraud & prize monitoring processing. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process is performed in steps A2002 and A2 in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.
It is executed in 004.

The fraud & prize monitoring process is performed by the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the second
This is a process performed on the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39. With regard to the special winning opening (special variation winning devices 38, 39), it is easy to illicitly open the opening/closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. ..

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch which is the error monitoring target (A2101), and determines whether or not it is in the fraud monitoring period (A2102).
The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the first special variation winning a prize device 38 is opened when the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning prize switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than during the special game state in which the second special variable winning a prize device 39 is opened when the winning prize switch to be error monitored is the upper special winning prize switch 39a.

Then, in the fraud monitoring period, the game control device 100 (the result of A2102 is "
Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). In addition, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and it is determined whether the number of illegal winnings after addition is illegal to be monitored. It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than the number (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason why the number of judgments is 5 is that, for example, when the special winning opening in the open state is converted into the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the special winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be fraudulent when a player has won a prize or when a signal has noise, and to prevent it from being easily determined to be an error even if it is not fraudulent.

And the game control device 100, if the number of judgments is not more than (the result of A2105 is "
N"), and prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). Also,
When the number is equal to or more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of illegal prizes is kept at the determined number of illegal occurrences (A2106), and the initial value (eg, 60000 ms) is set in the target illegal prize notification timer area.
) Is saved (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud generating command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud prize generating flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, when the improper monitoring period is not reached, the game control device 100 determines that the result of A2102 is "N".
)), prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110), and executes the winning number counter updating process for setting the winning ball (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112).
It is determined whether or not the notification timer has been updated (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when updating of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), −1 is updated if the target notification timer is not 0 (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

To update the notification timer, the winning prize switch to be monitored for errors is one
If it is 9a, it is permitted, and if the winning combination switch of the error monitoring target is the other upper special winning opening switch 39a, it is not permitted. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as to the irregularity notification regarding the second special variation winning device 39, and the specified time (for example, 6
It is prevented that the time is up in half of (0000 ms). In addition, when the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning prize switch 38a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A211).
5) If the value is not 0 (result of A2115 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When the value of the notification timer is 0 (
If the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (A2116), and the fraud prize cancellation flag is prepared as the fraud flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

In addition, the game control device 100, after the process of step A2119 is completed, or when the value of the notification timer has not become 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize monitoring process before the last time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. Also,
When the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (result of A2120 is “N”), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121),
A command setting process is executed (A2122). After that, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends.

By the above process, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the occurrence of fraud, and the fraud cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in response to the fraud cancellation, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winning prize counter update processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter updating process. The prize number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & prize monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (to be exact, a change in the input) in the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A220
The result of 2 is "Y"), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (A2203), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2204). Further, it is determined whether or not overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2205).

When the overflow has not occurred (result of A2205 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 ends or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the processing of step A2206 ends, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (result of A2212 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step A2202).
Return to processing. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2212 is “Y”)
), and ends the winning number counter updating process. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Production command setting process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (
A2301). Further, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

If the transmission buffer is not full (result of A2302 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

If the transmission buffer is full, the game control device 100 (the result of A2302 is "Y").
)), and the process returns to step A2301.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A2304) and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to step A2304.

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (result of A2305 is “N”), the game control device 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets production command. The process ends.

As described above, by transmitting the production command to the production control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the load on the game control device 100 and make the analysis of the production command difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the load can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 Abnormal variation monitoring processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process. The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing, step A200 in the winning a prize switch/state monitoring processing which is shown in Figure 19
It is executed in 7.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401). As will be described later, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 variation display game starts with a low probability of winning (including a normal gaming state). When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is "
N"), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set, the game control device 100 (A2401).
Result is “Y”), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (A2402), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (added by 1) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations in Toku-zu 1 is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (A2404). When the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (result of A2404 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

If the number of fluctuations in special figure 1 is equal to or greater than the specified value, the game control device 100 (the result of A2404 is “N”).
), special figure 2 If the abnormal fluctuation number is not 0, -1 is updated (only 1 is subtracted) (A2405), and special figure 1
The variation number is cleared to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407). When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (A240
7 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2410. As will be described later, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set each time the special figure 2 variation display game starts with a low probability of winning (including the normal gaming state).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A2407)
Result of "Y"), the special figure 2 variation check flag is cleared (A2408), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by +1 (A2409). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 5) (A2410).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is equal to or more than a specified value (the result of A2410 is "
N”), and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the prescribed value used for the determination in step A2410 (A2411). Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set to the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag indicating occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal change is prepared ( (A2413), a special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419.

When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer by -1 (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer has timed up (A2416). If the time has not expired (result of A2416 is “N”), the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process is ended.

When the game control device 100 has timed out (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the special figure 2
An abnormal variation cancellation flag is prepared (A2417), and a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A2418). Next, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (A2419). The prepared flag is the current special map 2
When the value is the same as the value in the abnormal variation flag area (the result of A2419 is “Y”), the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is ended.

When the prepared flag is different from the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (the result of A2419 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 determines whether the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag. Is determined (A2420). When the prepared flag is not the release flag (A242
When the result of 0 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2422.

When the prepared flag is the release flag (result of A2420 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 clears the special figure 2 abnormal variation number to 0 (A2421). That is, when the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared to 0. To do. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the flag in the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area, the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area is rewritten with the prepared flag. Next, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process is ended.

When a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area, an external information editing process described later is performed. Causes the security signal to be output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the effect control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command as the effect command, the effect control device 300 notifies the error by the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

In the normal game state (the probability of a big hit being low), the player usually hits the left with a second start winning opening 37 rather than a winning in the first starting winning opening 36. When the player wins more to win the game (when the probability of a small hit is high), the player may aim at the second start winning hole 37 by right-handing. In this case, the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed by the winning in the second starting winning opening 37, and an error is notified to the player to stop the right hit. In the normal game state, if left-handedness is performed,
The processing is performed by the normal route as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 23, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command (that is, error notification) is not generated, and the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is not started.

The special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing will be further described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 24A to 24C. 24A to 24C exemplify the results of the above-mentioned Toku-zu 2 abnormal change monitoring processing.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal game state (the probability of hit is low), and when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches a specified value (here, 5) (A241).
The result of 0 is "N"), the initial value (60 seconds) of the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer and the special figure 2 abnormal change generation command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the special figure 2 abnormal change generation command is received. The effect control device 300 can start notification of an error by the display device 41 or the speakers 19a and 19b.

After that, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (here, 5) (A
2411), unless the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set again, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is continuously updated by -1 from the next special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (A2410).
The result is "Y"). The effect control device 300 can continue error notification until the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer times out due to the lapse of the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value and the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is received. The prize balls are paid out even during the error notification.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71, an error occurrence can be notified to an external device such as a hall computer, and when performing a test shooting test, the test shooting test device is played. Machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process described later).

If the number of abnormal fluctuations of special figure 2 reaches the specified value (5 in this case) again while the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is timing (error is being notified), the initial value of special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer is reset again. After being set, error notification for 60 seconds can be started (timer reset). Also, a big hit (
At the time of start), a special figure 2 abnormal variation cancel command is transmitted, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number, the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer, and the special figure 1 variation number are cleared to 0 (the special figure displaying process, fanfare/
Interval processing transition setting processing).

Further, in FIG. 23, the variation check flag is set when the special figure variation display game starts in the low probability state, but the variation check flag has a winning in the starting winning opening in the low probability state. The control may be performed as set in some cases. In this case, as shown in FIG. 24B, control is performed using the number of winnings instead of the number of fluctuations, and in the normal gaming state, there are a plurality of winnings (special figure 2 winnings) to the second starting winning opening 37, Figure 2 The number of abnormal prizes is a specified value (here 5
) Is reached, error notification can be started.

In the control of FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 24A, after the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is finished, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is set to 0 (A2421), but as shown in FIG. 24B,
Special figure 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations (the number of abnormal prizes) may be maintained at a prescribed value.

In FIG. 24C, when the Toku-zu 1 variation number reaches a specified value (18 in this case) (the result of A2404 is “N”), the Toku-zu 2 abnormal variation number is updated by −1 to decrease from 4 to 3, for example. (A2405
), the situation where the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 is shown (A240
6). In this way, in the normal game state (the probability of hit is low), the right-handed special figure 2
Even if the variation display game is executed multiple times and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number rises, when the player returns to left-handing (stops right-handing) and the special figure 1 variation number reaches the specified value, 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is reduced, and error notification can be avoided.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check processing is step A201 in the winning opening switch/status monitoring processing shown in FIG.
0, A2012 and A2015.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (
A2502). If the signal to be checked is not ON (result of A2502 is “N”), that is, if the signal to be checked is OFF, a state OFF flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503) and the target state OFF command is acquired. And prepare (A2504). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state off flag indicates a normal state regarding an error system signal, and indicates a state without touch regarding a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2506), acquires a target state on command, and prepares. Yes (A2507). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state regarding an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch regarding a touch switch signal.

When the processing of step A2505 or step A2508 ends, the game control device 100
Determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2
509). If they do not match (the result of A2509 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510) and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A
2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512).
.. Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). When the updated value of the state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2513 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2513 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value − It remains at a value of 1 (A2514). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2515). If they match (A251
The result of 5 is "Y"), and the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (result of A2515 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. Yes (A2516). Finally, effect command setting processing for setting effect commands is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine state check processing is ended. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure of payout busy signal check processing. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2016 in the winning port switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is ON (A2601). Note that the payout busy signal indicates the payout control device 20.
When 0 cannot start the payout control, the ON state is set.

If the payout busy signal is not on, the game control device 100 (the result of A2601 is "
N”), an idle state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2602), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2603). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is ON (result of A2601 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as the determination status (A2604), and the ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2605). ).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value in the busy signal state area matches the current payout busy signal state (ON/OFF) (A2606). If they match (the result of A2606 is "Y"), the process moves to step A2609. If they do not match (result of A2606 is "N"), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2607), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2608).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2609), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or more than the timer comparison value (A2610). When the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is ended.

When the monitoring timer is equal to or more than the timer comparison value (the result of A2610 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value smaller than the timer comparison value by 1 (A2611). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2612), and the payout busy signal check processing is ended.

By the pay-out busy signal check process, the pay-out busy signal flag (
Busy signal status) is set. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a winning opening winning combination in the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, when there is no starting mouth winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening winning combination to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703).
Result of “Y”), it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a low probability state (A2704).
.. Then, in the low probability state (including during the normal gaming state) (the result of A2704 is "Y")
), and proceeds to the processing of step A2707.

When the probability of occurrence of a hit is not in the low probability state (when it is in the high probability state) (result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a right-handing instruction notification command as a production command (A2705), and produces. Command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the right-handing instruction display for instructing the right-handing as a warning on the display device 41 when the first start winning opening 36 has a starting mouth winning combination in a high probability state. it can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting opening 1 switch processing (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning at the second starting winning opening (starting opening 2) 37 (A2709), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. Yes (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a winning opening winning combination in the second starting winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no starting mouth prize (the result of A2711 is "N")
), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

The game control device 100, when there is a start opening prize to the second start winning opening 37 (A2711)
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A2712). When it is not in the high-probability state (when it is in the low-probability state) (result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit state (A2713). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A2713 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is being made (A27).
14). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high-probability final fluctuation flag set in the high-probability fluctuation number update processing described later.

Here, the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation) is a final special-character fluctuation display game when the special-character fluctuation display game starts in a high-probability state, for example, ST (special time). This is the final special figure fluctuation display game in the case where the high probability state is maintained for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of fluctuation starts after the jackpot is over.

If the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A2714 is “N”), the game control device 100,
A left-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2715), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2716). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays a left-handing instruction display for instructing left-handing on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a starting mouth winning in the second starting winning opening 37 during the normal gaming state. You can

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the second starting winning opening 37 (starting opening 2) (A2717), and executes special figure starting opening 2 switch processing (
A2718), and the start opening switch monitoring process is ended. The game control device 100 is in the high-probability state (result of A2712 is “Y”), in the big hit state (result of A2713 is “Y”), in the high-probability final fluctuation (result of A2714). Is “Y”), the left hitting instruction notification command is not prepared, and the processes of steps A2717 and A2718 are executed.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process.
The details of 710) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

The game control device 100 first sets the start-winning-win information indicating that there is no start-winning prize (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802).
If there is no input to the target switch (result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process ends. The target switch is the starting port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the starting port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

The game control device 100, when there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "Y
)), the random number latch register status (state of the random number latch register) is read, and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804).
If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process ends.

The game control device 100, when there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A280
The result of No. 4 is “Y”), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the target hard random number latch register to prepare (A2805), and the start mouth winning presence information indicating that there is a start mouth winning is set (A2806). .. The prepared jackpot random numbers are used in the special figure starting port 1 switch process and the special figure starting port 2 switch process.

[Special figure start opening 1 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 1 switch process (A2708) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above.
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 1 switch process.

The game control device 100 first loads the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switch 36a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (A2901). Furthermore, the value of the output number of the starting port 1 signal loaded is updated by +1 (A2
902), it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903).

When the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start mouth 1 signal output count area of the RWM (A2904).
). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure suspension (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 1 switch 36a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). If the number of reserved special maps is not less than the upper limit value (result of A2905 is “N”), the special map starting port 1 switch process is ended.

When the special figure reservation number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906) and updates the special figure 1 reservation number by +1. Yes (A2907). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). ). Subsequently, a big hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A291
0), the big hit symbol random number is saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).
Further, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2
912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) corresponding to the RWM ( A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) for determining special figure reservation information (A2914), and the decoration special figure 1 reservation number indicating the special figure 1 reservation number. A command is prepared as a production command (A2915), and production command setting processing is executed (A2915).
2916), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is ended. Details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 2 switch process (A2718) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above.
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch process.

The starting port 2 signal output frequency, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (A3001). further,
The value of the output number of the starting port 2 signal loaded is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A3003).

If the output count does not overflow (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the starting port 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004).
). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, in the game control device 100, the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid, that is, the starting opening 2
It is determined whether or not the detection of the switch 37a is invalid (A3005). In addition, during the big hit variation / small hit variation stop (during the special figure display process described later), during the big hit state (from the big hit variation stop to the big hit end processing described later), during the small hit state (from the small hit variation stop If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing) until the small hit end process described later), even if there is a game ball entering the second start winning opening 37, the second start is performed. It is treated as if there was no prize in the prize hole 37 and is invalidated. When the winning in the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special figure starting opening 2 switch process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the winning in the second start winning port 37 is not invalid (A3
The result of 005 is "N"), and the special figure 2 reservation number is set to 1 (A3006). Although the special figure 2 variable display game is started immediately after the special figure 2 start-up memory is generated, the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 for the purpose of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 starting storage (A3007), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A3008). ..

Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). In addition, a small hit symbol random number is extracted, and RWM
The small hit symbol is saved in the random number storing area (A3011). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (A3012), and the special figure starting port The two-switch process ends.

As described above, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started as soon as the special figure 2 starting memory is generated, the special figure starting port 2 switch process is different from the special figure starting port 1 switch process. , Special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) is not performed, and decoration special figure 2
No pending command is prepared.

As described above, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and extracts the predetermined random number, and the variable display game The starting prize storing means stores a predetermined number as a starting memory which is an execution right, with a predetermined upper limit. In addition, the starting winning prize storing means (game control device 100) has various random number values extracted based on winning of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 36, with a predetermined number (eg, 4) being the upper limit, and the first starting memory ( Special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 start prize memory), and various random number values extracted based on winning of the game ball into the second start prize hole 37 are set to a predetermined number (here, 1) as the upper limit. 2 Start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 start prize memory) are stored.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process (A2914) in the special figure starting port 1 switch process described above.
Will be described in detail. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, predetermination processing). The special figure reservation information determination processing is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3101). If it is not in the high probability state (result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit state (A3102). When it is not in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is "N"), the big hit determination process is executed based on the big hit random number value stored as the first starting memory (A3103).

When the high probability state (the result of A3101 is “Y”) or the big hit state (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the special figure holding information determination process does not perform the big hit determination process. The process ends as it is (preliminary determination (prefetch) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3104). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (A3105), and big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (A3106), and step A3111 Process shifts to.

When the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (in the case of a hit) (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random number value stored as the first starting memory. It is executed (A3107), and it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (
A3108). In this embodiment, a big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination.

If the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the small hit (A3109), and if the determination result is not a small hit (A3108). The result is “N”), and the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes an effect command setting process (A3112). Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (A3113) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variable display game. The variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed.
Then, the look-ahead variation pattern commands corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number are prepared as effect commands (A3115), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3116).

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3201). Special Figure 2 When it is neither in the big hit state or the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3201 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
1 is subtracted) (A3203). The special processing 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by the -1 update. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3203 is performed without performing the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). Special Figure 1 If the game processing timer is not 0 (A3204
Result of “N”), the process proceeds to step A3219.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure 1
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3).
206). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 1 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3207).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A3207, the game control device 100,
Special figure 1 The variation start of the variable display game is monitored, and the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is set, the effect is set, and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 variation process is set. 1) Perform usual processing (A3208). Note that details of the special figure 1 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “1” in step A3207, the game control device 100:
The special figure 1 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A3209). The details of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “2” in step A3207, the game control device 100,
Special Figure 1 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. Special diagram 1 for setting the necessary information for
Processing during display is executed (A3210). For details of the processing during the display of special figure 1, see FIG.
It will be described later in 7.

If the game process number is “3” in step A3207, the game control device 100:
The fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and setting the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening is executed (A3211). The details of the fanfare/interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “4” in step A3207, the game control device 100:
If the big hit round is not the final round, set an interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A3212). Details of the special winning opening opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

If the game process number is “5” in step A3207, the game control device 100,
If the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the jackpot and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing etc. It is executed (A3213). For details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing, see FIG.
See below.

If the game processing number is “6” in step A3207, the gaming control device 100,
The special figure 2 game wait time value (to be described later) is set, and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is executed to set the information necessary for executing the special figure 1 normal processing (A3214). In addition, special figure 1
Details of the big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

If the game process number is “7” in step A3207, the game control device 100,
The small hit fanfare middle processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set information necessary for performing the small hit processing (A3215). The details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

If the game process number is “8” in step A3207, the game control device 100:
Processing for setting a small hit completion command, processing for setting small information for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are executed (A3216). Details of the small hit mid-process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

If the game process number is “9” in step A3207, the game control device 100,
A small hit remaining ball process is performed to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3217). ..
The details of the small hit remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets information required for setting the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or executing the special figure 1 usual process. The special figure 1 small hitting end processing for setting etc. is executed (A3218). The details of the special figure 1 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the process based on the special figure 1 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3219), and then displays the special figure 1 The symbol variation control process related to the container 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the big hit state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3301). Special figure 2 When it is neither in the big hit state or the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A3303). The Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process of step A3303 is performed without performing the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). Special Figure 2 If the game processing timer is not 0 (A3304
Result of “N”), the process proceeds to step A3322.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), that is, when the game control device 100 has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the number of repeats of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"),
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306), and the long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3307). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the variation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3303-A3307. The timer value for long variation is repeatedly counted by the above process for the number of times of repetition to prepare a timer with a long variation time for the special figure 2 variable display game.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3304 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (a result of A3305 is “Y”). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 2 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (A3310).

If the game process number is “0” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
Special figure 2 The variation start of the variable display game is monitored, and the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, the effect is set, and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 variation process is set. 2 Perform normal processing (A3311). The details of the special figure 2 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “1” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
The special figure 2 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

If the game process number is “2” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
Special Figure 2 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. Special figure 2 for setting necessary information for
Processing during display is executed (A3313). For details of the processing during the display of special figure 2, see FIG.
It will be described later in 8.

If the game process number is “3” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
The fanfare/interval processing is performed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A3314). The fanfare/interval processing is common to that executed in the Toku-zu 1 game processing, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

If the game process number is “4” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
If the big hit round is not the final round, set an interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A3315). The special winning opening opening process is common to the process executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

If the game process number is “5” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
If the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the jackpot and the jackpot remaining ball processing to set the information necessary to perform the jackpot end processing etc. Execute (A3316). The special winning opening remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is “6” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
Special figure 2 The special figure 2 big hit ending processing which sets the information and the like necessary for executing the normal processing is executed (A3317). The details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

If the game process number is “7” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
The small hit fanfare middle processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the small hit processing (A3318). The small hitting fanfare middle processing is common to the processing executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

If the game processing number is “8” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
Processing for setting a small hit ending command, processing for setting small information for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are executed (A3319). The small hitting process is common to the process executed in the special figure 1 game process, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

If the game process number is “9” in step A3310, the game control device 100,
A small hit remaining ball process is executed to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening, and to set the information necessary to perform the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3320). ..
The small hit remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

When the game process number is “10” in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game process number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special figure 2 The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process (A
3202, A3302) will be described in detail. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the upper special winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is open (A3401), and when the upper special winning opening is not open (the result of A3401 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the remaining big ball of the upper special winning opening is being processed (A3402). When the remaining ball processing of the upper special winning opening is not being performed (the result of A3402 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is open (A3403). In the case of the big hit state or the small hit state, the upper special winning opening and/or the lower special winning opening may be open.

When the lower special winning opening is open, the game control device 100 (the result of A3403 is “Y”)
, It is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (A3404), and if there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (the result of A3404 is "Y"), the addition is made in the present special winning opening switch monitoring processing. The winning prize counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening is set to 1 (A3405). When the lower special winning opening is not open (the result of A3403 is “N”) or when there is no input to the lower special winning opening switch (the result of A3404 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. To do.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the upper special winning opening is open (the result of A3401 is "
Y”), or when the remaining balls of the upper special winning opening are being processed (the result of A3402 is “Y”), the winning counter is set to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 of the upper special winning opening switches 39a (A3407), and when there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "N"). ), and proceeds to the processing of step A3411.

When there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a special winning opening count command as an effect command for effecting a prize (A3408), The effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is incremented by 1 (A3410).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (A3411). When there is no input to the upper prize hole switch 2 (the result of A3411 is "N
)), the process moves to step A3415. When there is an input to the upper special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3411 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command to perform an effect by winning (A3412), and effect command setting processing is executed. (A341
3), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3414).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415).
When the winning counter is not 0 (result of A3415 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A3416). When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3416 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (A3417). If the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (result of A3417 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (here, 1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (A3418).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3415 is “Y”).
)), when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (result of A3416 is “Y”), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (result of A3417 is “Y”), special winning opening switch monitoring processing To finish.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than an upper limit value (eg, 9 playable balls in one round) (A3419), and the special winning opening count number is determined. Is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3419 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3419 is “Y”), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (A3420), and the target special figure game processing timer area is set to 0.
Clear (A3421).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot is being opened (A3422).
If the jackpot is not open (result of A3422 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the jackpot is being opened (the result of A3422 is "Y"), the jackpot opening operation end value is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (A3423), and then the jackpot switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3208) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal process of the special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3501). If the fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (if fluctuation start is impossible) (result of A3501 is "N"), the special drawing 1 in the game process number area of RWM
The processing number “0” is usually saved (A3502). It should be noted that, here, from the end of the big hit variation of the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 2 big hit), and the small figure of the special figure 2 variable display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 2 small hit ending process), the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start changing.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3501)
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been informed (A3503). If the left-handing instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handing instruction has been informed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (A35
The result of 03 is "Y"), and the process proceeds to step A3507.

In the case where the left-hand instruction has not been notified to the game control device 100 (the result of A3503 is “N”)
, A left-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A3504), effect command setting processing is executed (A3505), and a left-handing instruction notification indicating that the left-handing instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like. The flag is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3507).
.. When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (result of A3507 is “Y”), the special figure 1 usual process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3502). As a result, the special figure 1 normal process is repeated until the number of reserved special figure 1 is 1 or more.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (result of A3507 is "N"),
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3508), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3509).
). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A
3510). After that, a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing or (special figure 1 changing+special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3514), and if it is not in a high probability state (
If it is in the low probability state (the result of A3514 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3515). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

If the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3515 is “N”), the gaming control device 100,
The special figure 1 variation check flag is set (A3516), and the special figure 1 variation process transition setting processing is executed (A3517). The special figure 1 variation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring processing (FIG. 23).

On the other hand, when the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A3514 is “Y”),
Alternatively, when the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (result of A3515 is “Y”), the special-figure 1 fluctuation-in-progress processing transition setting processing is executed without setting the special-figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A3517).

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 ordinary process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3601). Toku-zu 2 If the fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (if fluctuation cannot start) (result of A3601 is “N”), the special drawing 2 in the game process number area of RWM
The processing number "0" is usually saved (A3602). Here, from the end of the big hit variation of the special figure 1 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 1 big hit), and the small figure of the special figure 1 variable display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the small hit operation (the special figure 1 small hit end process), the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start changing.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3601)
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (A3602). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (the result of A3602 is "N"), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3603).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A3604). Then, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, it is determined whether the probability of occurrence of a hit is in the high probability state (A3607), and if it is not in the high probability state (A3607)
If it is in the low probability state (the result of A3607 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3608). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

If the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3608 is “N”), the game control device 100,
The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (A3609), and the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting processing is executed (A3610). The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is used in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 23) described above.

On the other hand, when the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A3614 is “Y”),
Alternatively, if the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (result of A3615 is “Y”), the special-character 2 fluctuation-in-progress processing transition setting processing is executed without setting the special-character 2 fluctuation checking flag (A3617).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3602 is "Y"),
It is determined whether the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 or not (A3611). Special Figure 1 If the number of reservations is 0 (
The result of A3611 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3612). When Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A3612 is "N")
), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (A3613). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3613 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3614).
..

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615) and executes an effect command setting process (A3616).
The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3617). As a result, the special figure 2 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3611 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed, and therefore the RWM special feature will not be prepared without preparing a customer waiting demo command. Figure 2
Special figure 2 usual processing number "0" is saved in the game processing number area (A3617). In addition, when the special figure 1 is changing (result of A3612 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demonstration is already started (result of A3613 is “Y”), a customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. RWM without
Special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A3617).

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). The special figure 1 information setting flag is for setting the variation information (including sorting of the prefetch variation pattern).
) And so on. Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process (A3) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit
702), the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A370) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
3) The special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3705). ). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) that sets a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3706) that sets fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3708). When not in a high probability state (the result of A3708 is "N")
, It is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3709). When the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (result of A3709 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A3710).

When the special figure 2 is changing (the result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is “Y”), that is, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is within the range of the time value of the special figure 2 game processing timer. If it is, the process proceeds to step A3714.

The game control device 100, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3
The result of 711 is “N”), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 as the predetermined number of times.
It is determined whether or not the above (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than the predetermined number (here, 4) (the result of A3712 is "N"), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated by a value of (value of special figure 2 game processing timer area+repetition count×60000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3714). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (
The result of A3714 is "N"), and a command for notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (
(A3715), the effect command setting process is executed (A3716). If the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is equal to or longer than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, etc. The production related to the game may end suddenly. Therefore, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, something that is not flashy so as not to give the player a feeling of strangeness.

Next, the game control device 100 changes the number of fluctuations of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state (
A high-probability variation number update process for updating and managing the remaining number) is executed (A3717), and the special figure 1 variation start process ends.

On the other hand, in the high probability state (result of A3708 is “Y”), in the high probability final fluctuation (result of A3709 is “Y”), when the special figure 2 is not changing (result of A3710 is “
N)), the processes of steps A3711 to A3716 are not performed, and the process proceeds to step A3717.

Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (4 in this case) (the result of A3712 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. Since (240 (=4×60) seconds or more in this case) is longer than the longest variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer Without preparing, shifts to the processing of step A3717.

Furthermore, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (result of A3714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further changes the special figure 1 variable display game. Without preparing a command to notify that the fluctuation time of
The processing moves to 17.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). Note that the special figure 2 information setting flag is for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns).
) And so on. Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process (A3) for setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit
802), special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (A380) relating to the setting of special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
3) The special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3805). ). Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) that sets a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3806) that sets fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 variable display game ( (A3807), a high-probability fluctuation number update process for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM (
A3901a), the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3902a).
). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM and prepared (A3903a). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). Then, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3905a). When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3905a is "N"), the big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random number value (A
3906a), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907a). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3902a (A3908a).
), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. ..

The game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3905a is "
Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907a is “N”), is the special figure 1 variable display game a small hit based on the obtained big hit random number value? A small hit determination process for determining whether or not it is executed (A3909a), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3910a). In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit judgment and the big hit judgment).
.. If the special display 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is “Y”), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3901a (A3911a), The jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not the small hit (the result of A3910a is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the “small hit flag 1” in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 39A) is set to “small hit flag 2”, the “big hit flag 1” is set to “big hit flag 2”, and the “big hit flag 2” is set. Is replaced with "big hit flag 1" and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition,
Steps A3901b-A3911b in the jackpot flag 2 setting process correspond to steps A3901a-A3911a in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, respectively.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing)
Details of A3906a and A3906b) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special figure suspension information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A400
The result of 2 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007), and the big hit judgment process is ended.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A4
The result of 002 is "N"), and it is determined whether the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A40).
03). If it is in the high probability state (result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (result of A4003 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A4005).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is “N”), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the small hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
Details of A3909a and A3909b) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination processing is common to the small hit determination processing in other processing executed during the timer interrupt processing, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure reservation information determination processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value). In the present embodiment,
The small hit random number is not independently provided, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A
The result of 4101 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A4106), and the small hit determination process ends.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game. Yes (A4102). Then, when information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A4102 is "Y"), a small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, if the information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game is not being set (result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4104).

After setting the small hit upper limit judgment value, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4105 is “Y”), deviation is set as the judgment result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A41
The result of 05 is "N"), and a small hit is set as the determination result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

FIG. 42 shows a jackpot probability (probability that the determination result will be a jackpot), a small hit probability (probability that the determination result will be a jackpot), and a deviation probability (determination result will be a deviation) by the above-described jackpot determination processing and small hit determination processing. Probability) for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. 42A shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 42B shows the probability in the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot occurrence) is higher in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The probability of small hit (probability of occurrence of small hit) is the same in the high-probability state and the low-probability state. The loss probability (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 2 variable display game. The deviation probability is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the deviation probability is 0 in the special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, since the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is more advantageous to the player than the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (particularly with respect to the small hit probability), the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring processing Is executed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5, 6A, and 6B, the jackpot symbols are only probability variation symbols, and after the jackpot state (special game state) ends, the probability state is high (probability variation state) without exception,
The probability variation inrush rate is 100%. In addition, the high probability state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 5
It continues until the variable display game (0 times) starts.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4301a). When the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4301a is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4302a). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4303a), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 1 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4304a). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A43
05a), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4307a), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4308a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4301a is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is in the small hit flag 1 area. It is determined whether or not it is saved (A4309a). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4310a). Next, the special figure 1 small hitting symbol table is set (A4311a), the stopped symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hitting symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol saving area (A4312a). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

The game control device 100, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is "
N"), the stop symbol number at the time of detachment is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (A4314a).
, The out-of-stop symbol design pattern is saved in the symbol design pattern area (A4315a). Then, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

After the steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4316a). Note that the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol of FIG. 5, a plurality of jackpot symbols (4R probability variation A2, 8R probability variation A3,
16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and any of the small hit symbols (special figure 1 small hit). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 displays the decoration special drawing 1 command as the effect command.
Save in the command area (A4317a) and execute effect command setting processing (A431).
8a). The decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is 0.
Clear (A4320a), clear the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reserved 1) to 0 (
A4321a). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

Special figure 2 stop design setting processing, in the special figure 1 stop design setting processing (Figure 43A) “small hit flag 1” to “small hit flag 2”, “big hit flag 1” to “big hit flag 2”, The special figure 1" is replaced with the "special figure 2", and the same processing as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is performed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, step A4 in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process
301b-A4321b is step A43 in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, respectively.
01a-A4321a.

Note that the stop symbol pattern set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the outlier symbol of FIGS. 6A and 6B, a plurality of jackpot symbols (2R probability variation D1, 4R probability variation D3, 8R probability variation E2, 16R probability variation E1, F2, F3), and, corresponding to any of a plurality of small hit symbols (special figure 2 small hit 1-3). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning opening 36, and the game ball in the second starting winning opening 37 A variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection is formed. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). If it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A4401 is “N”), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the latter-half fluctuations. The first half fluctuation is the fluctuation mode before the start of reach,
The second-half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N"). ), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405).
).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405)
The result is “Y”), and in order to distribute the latter half variation according to the number of special figure 1 reservations, the value is updated by adding the number of special figure 1 reservations to the latter half offset data (A4406), and according to the number of special figure 1 reservations. In order to allocate the first half fluctuation, the special figure 1 reserved number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (A
4407). Toku-zu 1 If the result of the variable display game is not a small hit (in the case of a hit) (A44
If the result of 05 is "N"), the process of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 reservation number is added only to the first half offset data to convert the value (A4407).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404).
Result of "Y"), the processing of steps A4405-A4407 is not performed, and step A440
The first half offset data and the second half offset data acquired in 3 are not updated and converted, and the process proceeds to step A4412.

On the other hand, when the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A4401 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4408). Special figure 1 If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is "N"), the special figure 1 at the time of high probability
Set the first half offset data for out-of-range/small hit (A4409), and then step A441.
The processing shifts to 1. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 1 at a high probability is set (A44).
10). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4411). As a result, in the high-probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game is changed for a long time.

After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable allocation information 1) in the variable allocation information 1 area of the RWM (A4
412), the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). If it is in the high probability state (result of A4501 is “N”), the variation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuations.

On the other hand, when the gaming control device 100 is not in the high probability state (in the low probability state) (A450
The result of 1 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A4).
504). Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N")
), the first half offset data for the outlier/small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4505).
), the process moves to step A4507. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (result of A4504 is “Y”), the first half offset data for big hit of special figure 2 at low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4507). As a result, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 variable display game is changed for a long time (long change).

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). Save in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of RWM (A450
9), the special figure 2 information setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601)
, Obtain the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepare (A
4602), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of Toku-zu 1 (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A4604). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (the result of A4604 is "Y"), 2-byte allocation processing based on the variable pattern random number 1 is executed (A460).
5) If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not off (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (A
The result of 4604 is “N”), and the distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4
606).

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hitting and the deviating, and the random number for distribution has a 1-byte size for the hitting and a 2-byte size for the deviating. The hit size is 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate per hit of the special figure 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607). continue,
Fluctuating pattern random number 2 as a random number from the fluctuating pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) of special figure 1
Is loaded and prepared (A4608), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4610). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614), and the distribution processing based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution,
The first half variation number area is saved (A4616), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process ends.
By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the latter half variation selection address table (A4701)
, The address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (A4
702). Then, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 to prepare (A4703), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4705). Through the above processing, the latter half variation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4706), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 to prepare (A4709), and the distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution,
The first half variation number area is saved (A4711), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends.
By the above processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4801), It is determined whether or not the code has no distribution (A480
2).

Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), since distribution is not necessary, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is defined at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (result of A4802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4807). ) End the 2-byte sorting process.

On the other hand, when the top data of the latter half variation group table is not a code without distribution (result of A4802 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 defines one distribution value initially defined in the latter half variation group table. Is obtained (A4803).

Next, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in the process of step A4803 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. And a new random number value is calculated (A4804). Further, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4805).

If the new random number value is not smaller than "0", the game control device 100 (A4805).
Result is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4806), step A
Processing after 4803 is executed. That is, the distribution value defined next in the variable group selection table is acquired (A4803), the distribution value is subtracted using the random number value determined in the process of step A4805 as a new random value, and a new random value is added. Is calculated (A480
4). Then, with respect to the calculated new random number value, each process is executed until it is determined in the process of step A4805 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4805 is “Y”). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table.

Then, the game control device 100, if the new random number value is smaller than "0" (A48
The result of 05 is "Y"), and the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A480
7) The 2-byte sorting process is completed.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution process (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of distribution processing. The distribution process is
Selects the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, and displays the special figure variation table from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2. Select the second half fluctuation pattern of the game, or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group)
Is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game.

The game control device 100 firstly prepares the second half variation group table (selection table).
Then, it is checked whether the leading data of the latter half variation selection table (selection table) or the first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A49).
01), it is determined whether or not the code has no distribution (A4902).

Here, like the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one of the latter half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern. If there is no selection table, the distribution value is "0"
That is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, the gaming control device 100, when the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (A490).
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), and the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A4907).
), the distribution process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the first data of the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (A4902).
Result of “N”), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the loaded random number value (variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3).
The distribution value acquired in step A4903 is subtracted from the calculated new random number value (A
4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4905).

If the new random number value is not smaller than "0", the game control device 100 (A4905).
Result of "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4906), and step A49
The processing from 03 is executed. That is, the distribution value defined next in the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4903), and the distribution value is determined as a new random number value determined in step A4905. Subtraction is performed and a new random number value is calculated (A4904). Then, the process is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half variation number and the first half variation number is selected from at least one of the second half variation pattern and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation selection table and the first half variation selection table.

Then, the game control device 100, when the new random number value is smaller than “0” (A49
The result of 05 is "Y"), and the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A490
7) The distribution process is ended.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3 in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing
707, A3807) will be described in detail. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A5001). Toku-zu 1 When information is being set for the variable display game (A5
The result of 001 is "Y"), and the random number storage areas (for the holding sphere 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the used special figure 1 are cleared (A5002). When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5001 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game. Clear the storage area (A500
3).

After the steps A5002 and A5003, the game control device 100 sets the first-half fluctuation time value table (A5004) and acquires the first-half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first-half fluctuation number (A50).
05). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500
8), save the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5009). continue,
It is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5010). Toku-zu 1 If information regarding the variable display game is not being set (result of A5010 is “N”), toku-zu 2
Since information is being set regarding the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5011).

When the game control device 100 does not start the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5011)
Result is "N"), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50).
12), when the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is started (the result of A5011 is “Y”),
Special Figure 2 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (A5013). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, since the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) which is not enough for the 2-byte timer is varied, the predetermined number of repetitions (9 here) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (millisecond), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area, 60000 ms
When the timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and the number of times of repeating 9 times is saved,
The timer is subtracted in the timer interrupt process (particularly, the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 33)) (A3
303), when the time is up (result of A3304 is “Y”), the number of times of repetition is decremented by 1 (A3306), and the game processing timer is set to the long variation timer value of 60000 ms (60 seconds). As a result, the long-varying Toku-zu 2 variable display game was run for 60,000 msec.
+(60000 msec×9)=a long fluctuation time of 10 minutes can be set.

The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (the number of repetitions=0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A50
The result of step 10 is “Y”), and the step A5014 is performed without setting the number of times the timer repeats.
Move to.

After the steps A5010, A5012, and A5013, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A5017). Toku-zu 1 When information is being set for the variable display game (A5
The result of 017 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number is updated by -1 (A5018), the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game are shifted (A5019), and the empty area after the shift is cleared. Yes (A5020). Toku-zu 1 If information about variable display game is not being set (A5017)
The result is “N”), and because information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the variation start information setting process is performed without shifting the contents of the random number storage area (since the special figure 1 number of reservations is 1). finish.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, the high-probability fluctuation number update process (A in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A
3717, A3808) will be described in detail. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability fluctuation number updating process. In the high-probability variation number update processing, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). When it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A5101 is “N”), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is ended.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is in a low-probability state (can be set to a low-probability state by a fanfare/interval processing shift setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variable display game but also the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in a low probability state, and the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. Not only the variable display game shown in FIG. 2 but also the special display variable display game is executed in a low probability state. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit,
There is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in a high probability state.

When the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (result of A5101 is “Y”), the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state is updated by −1 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A5102). The initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (to be described later in special figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 big hit end processing. ). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (A51
03). When the number of times of high probability variation is not 0 (result of A5103 is “N”), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the high probability variation number updating process is ended. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5103 is “Y”), the signal regarding the end of the high probability (off data of two big hits) is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, a signal relating to the high probability & shortening of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5105). High probability & signal regarding the end of time saving, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation This is the off data of the time reduction state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area of the RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (( (A5107), the high-probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the variation is set (A5108), and the high-probability variation number updating process is ended.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag is information for indicating that the fluctuation has started during the high probability even during the low probability. In the high-probability final change (high-probability final change), unless the probability is lowered to a low probability immediately after the start of the change, the winning judgment based on the starting mouth winning during the final change is performed with a high probability. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the high probability final fluctuation is started, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special figure low probability & no time saving flag. Therefore, the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set and used to determine whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is generated (for example, step A2714).
, A3515, A3608, A3709 etc.). Also, the high probability final fluctuation flag is
It also includes information that can determine which of the special probability 1 and the special probability 2 is the high-probability final variation.

As described above, after the big hit, the high probability state is a predetermined number of times (the initial value of the high probability variation number,
It is maintained until the variable display game is started 50 times, and the number of high-probability fluctuations becomes 0, and when the predetermined number of variable display games (high-probability final fluctuation) are started, there is no special figure low probability and no time saving. The flag is set, the low probability state ends, the time saving state ends, and the high probability final variation flag is set.

[Special figure 1 processing transition setting processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 in-fluctuating process shift setting processing (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal processing will be described. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 changing process transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "1" in order to shift to the process during fluctuation of special figure 1.
Is set (A5201a), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5
202a). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5203a), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (ON data of the special symbol 1 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A5205a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special display 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (A5206).
a), the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating the non-illuminated symbol in FIG. 5) is saved in the changing symbol number area of the special figure 1 (A5207a), and the special figure 1 changing processing transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Special figure 2 process change setting process during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process.

Special figure 2 process transition setting process during change, "special diagram 1" (special symbol 1) in the special process 1 transition process transition setting process (Fig. 52A) is replaced with "special diagram 2" (special symbol 2) Since the same process as the special figure 1 changing process shift setting process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition,
Steps A5201b-A5207b in the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process correspond to steps A5201a-A5207a in the special process changing process shift setting process, respectively.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5301).
The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special drawing 1 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5
302) and execute effect command setting processing (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5
304), the effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5306). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation count update processing, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is high. When the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (A530
The result of 6 is "Y"), and the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set as the stop symbol display time (stop display time) of special figure 1 (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 mse if the stop symbol pattern is the deviating symbol of the special figure 1.
c, 2000 msec for the big hit design of Toku-zu 1, 136 for the small hit design of Toku-zu 1
msec.

The game control device 100, if the special figure 1 variation display game to start is not a high-probability final variation (
The result of A5306 is "N"), and the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is set as the display time of Toku-zu 1 (A5308). For example, the display time when the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 1 stop symbol Special figure 1 loaded from the evacuation area
Save in the stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special display 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A5309 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special display 2 variable display game also. It is determined whether or not it is being executed (A5310). Toku-zu 2 is not changing (A53
The result of 10 is "N"), and the process proceeds to step A5320. When the Toku-zu 2 is also changing (result of A5310 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the below-mentioned Toku-zu 2 displaying process is being executed (A5311).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5311 is "
Y”), and the process proceeds to step A5313. When the special figure 2 display process is not being executed (
The result of A5311 is “N”), and the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by +1 (A5312). Subsequently, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of Toku-zu 1 (display time of Toku-zu + 4 msec) is set as the display time of Toku-zu 2 (A5313), and is displayed in the Toku-zu 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game process (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3303), so that it is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. In addition, if the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the falling pattern command of the decorative special drawing 2 as a production command (A5315), and executes production command setting processing (A5316). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5318). After that, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 2 in-process is executed (
A5319).

By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, the result of deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special map 2 (end of special figure 2 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is in execution (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variable display game Is forced to end the fluctuation (forced end) due to the deviation result.

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) is up (A3204). Since the result is executed "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 1 command from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A5321). Special figure 1 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the special pattern 1 information that was saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 1 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5321 is “N”), the game control device 100 selects the upper limit of the number of rounds from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5322).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the aforementioned special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5323). Then, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during change of special figure 2).
Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the result.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5401).
The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process described later. Next, the decoration special drawing 2 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5
402), effect command setting processing is executed (A5403). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5
404), the effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) (A5406). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation count update processing, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is high. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to start is not a high-probability final fluctuation (A540
The result of 6 is "N"), and the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 is set as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of special figure 2 (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 mse if the stop symbol pattern is the deviating symbol of the special figure 2.
c, 600msec for the big hit design of special figure 2, 600m for the small hit design of special figure 2
sec. In addition, the display time of the deviating symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variation display game to start is a high-probability final variation (
The result of A5406 is “Y”), and the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is set as the display time of Toku-zu 2 (A5408). For example, the display time when the high-probability final change is 7000 msec.

After the steps A5407 and A5408, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A5409). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of off) saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the special figure 2 stop symbol. Special figure 2 loaded from the evacuation area
Save in the stop symbol area (A5424).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not missing (A5410)
The result is “N”), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed) (A5410). Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A5410 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5420. Toku-zu 1 is also changing (result of A5410 is "Y
)), it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 display processing described later is being executed (A5411).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5411 is "
Y”), and the process proceeds to step A5413. When the special figure 1 process is not being executed (
The result of A5411 is “N”), and the number of times the symbol determination number of times is output is updated by +1 (A5412). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2+4 msec) is set (A5413), and displayed in the game processing timer area of the special figure 1. Save the time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3203), so that it is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 can be made the same. In addition, if the stop display of the special figure 1 has already started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the falling pattern command of the decorative special drawing 1 as a production command (A5415), and executes production command setting processing (A5416). Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5418). After that, the special figure 1 during-display processing shift setting processing 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 1 during display processing is executed (
A5419).

By the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, the result of deviation of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special map 1 (end of special display 1 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game has a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variable display game Is forced to end the fluctuation (end of execution) as a result of the deviation.

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 2 game processing timer repeats 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3304 and A3305). Is executed for "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended in variation (end of execution) when the special result 2 variable display game in which the hit result stops.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 2 command from the decoration special drawing 2 command area, and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5421). Special figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5421 is “N”), the game control device 100 selects the upper limit of the number of rounds from the special figure 2 upper limit number of rounds information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5422).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5423). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, the special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 2 during display process is executed (A5425), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during change of special figure 1).
Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the result.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 display processing transition setting process 1.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" in order to shift to the process in displaying the special figure 1.
Is set (A5501a) and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A551a).
02a), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (off data of the special symbol 1 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51, is the special figure 1 change control flag. The data is saved in the area (A5504a), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 2 display transition process setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (A5425) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first shifts to "2" as a process number in order to shift to the process during display of special figure 2.
Is set (A5501b) and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A55
02b), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (off data of the special symbol 2 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

Next, the game control device 100, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag. The data is saved in the area (A5504b), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (A5419) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 56A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 1 display process shift setting process 2. In the special figure 1 during-display process shift setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended by hitting the special figure 2 variable display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" in order to shift to the process in displaying the special figure 1.
Is set (A5601a) and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A561a).
02a), the signal relating to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5
603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (A5604a). ).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the stop symbol pattern area, saves the stop symbol pattern (A5605a), and clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (A5606a),
Special Figure 1 Clear the special winning opening opening information area (A5607a). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Then, clear the special symbol 1 stop symbol evacuation area (A5610a),
Special figure 1 Stop symbol number is shifted to the stop symbol area (stop symbol number at the time of deviation) is saved (A
5611a). By the above-described processing, the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 becomes a variable stop (variation end) with a stop symbol that is out of order.

[Special figure 2 display transition processing setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2. In the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended by hitting the special figure 1 variable display game.

The game control device 100 first shifts to "2" as a process number in order to shift to the process during display of special figure 2.
Is set (A5601b), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A561).
02b), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5).
603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (A5604b). ).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the stop symbol pattern area, saves the stop symbol pattern (A5605b), and clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (A5606b),
Special Figure 2 Clear the special winning opening opening information territory (A5607b). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Then, clear the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (A5610b),
Special figure 2 Stop symbol number is shifted to the stop symbol area (stop symbol number at the time of deviation) is saved (A
5611b). By the above-described processing, the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 becomes a variable stop (variation end) with a stop symbol that is out of order.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. 57A and 57B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 1. 57A shows the first half of the processing during the display of the special figure 1, and FIG. 57B shows the second half of the processing during the display of the special figure 1.

The game control device 100, first, from the small hit flag 1 area, small hit flag 1 (small hit information,
Alternatively, the deviation information) is loaded (A5701) and the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5702). Then, from the big hit flag 1 area, big hit flag 1 (big hit information, or
(Indicating deviance information) is loaded (A5703), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5).
704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A5705)
The result is "Y"), and the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5706). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the ON data of the special symbol 1 signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5708).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5709), and obtains the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. Acquire and save it in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5
710). The upper limit number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes an effect command setting process (A57).
13). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, a fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5714), and production command setting processing is executed (A5715).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal turns on at jackpots other than 2R, turns on at a 2R jackpot in high probability, and turns off at a 2R jackpot in low probability,
The jackpot 3 signals turn on at jackpots other than 2R, turn off at a 2R jackpot in high probability, and turn on at a 2R jackpot in low probability.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5717), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening that opens the upper special winning opening based on the special winning opening opening information (A5719).

When the game control device 100 is a big hit of the upper special winning opening opening (the result of A5719 is "Y").
)), clear the upper special winning opening fraudulent prize number area (A5720), save the fraud monitoring outside flag in the RWM upper special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A5721), and fanfare /
In order to shift to the processing during the interval, "3" is set as the processing number (A5724).
If it is not a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5719 is “N”), the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A5722), and the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the RWM is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5723), and "3" is set as the process number in order to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5724).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5
725), and executes the processing transition setting processing during fanfare/interval (A5726),
The process of displaying the special figure 1 ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (A5
The result of 705 is “N”), and it is determined based on the small hit flag 1 whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) ( A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final change (A5728). When the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (the result of A5728 is "Y
)), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5729), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5730).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at power failure recovery of the RWM (A5731), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A57).
32). The transmission command area upon power failure recovery saves the command output to the performance control device 300 upon power recovery. After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and effect command setting processing is executed (A57).
34). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, if the current special figure 1 variation display game is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5728 is “N”), the game control device 100 proceeds from step A5729 to A5729.
Without performing the process of 5732, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5734).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5735), and executes an effect command setting process (A5736). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (A5737). If not in high probability state (
The result of A5737 is "N"), the signal regarding the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738), and the second gaming state informing that it is right-handed In order to turn off the display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area of the RWM (A5739). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A5737 is “Y”), the signal related to the right-handing instruction (on data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), and the right-handing is performed. In order to turn on the second game state display portion 56 (lamps D8 to D10) that informs that, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5741).

After steps A5739 and A5741, the gaming control device 100 clears the lower special winning opening fraud prize number area (A5742), saves the fraud monitoring outside flag in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), Toku-zu 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is executed (A5744), and Toku-zu 1 displaying processing ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is “N”), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5745). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5754 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

When it is a high-probability final variation (result of A5745 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as a production command (A5746), and executes production command setting processing (A5747). .. Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5748), and the left-hand instruction command notification flag is cleared (A57).
49). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5750).
). When the special display 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5750 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

If the special control 2 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5750 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A5).
751). Then, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8) for notifying that it is right-handed
In order to turn off -D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5752), and the change in special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5).
753). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 1 normal process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 1 normal process shift setting process 1, "0" is set as a process number in order to shift to the special process 1 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 58A and FIG. 58B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 2. FIG. 58A shows the first half of the processing during display of the special figure 2, and FIG. 58B shows the second half of the processing during display of the special figure 2.

The game control device 100, first, from the small hit flag 2 area, small hit flag 2 (small hit information,
Alternatively, the deviation information) is loaded (A5801) and the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5802). Next, from the big hit flag 2 area, big hit flag 2 (big hit information, or
(Departure information) is loaded (A5803), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5).
804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A5805).
The result is "Y"), and the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal, the on-data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the on-data of the special symbol 2 per signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared as an effect command (A5807), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5808).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a round number upper limit value table (A5809), and obtains the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. Acquire and save it in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5
810). The upper limit number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Then, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5811).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes an effect command setting process (A58).
13). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, a fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5814), and production command setting processing is executed (A5815).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, two big hit signals and three big hit signals that are turned on or off depending on conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal turns on at jackpots other than 2R, turns on at a 2R jackpot in high probability, and turns off at a 2R jackpot in low probability,
The jackpot 3 signals turn on at jackpots other than 2R, turn off at a 2R jackpot in high probability, and turn on at a 2R jackpot in low probability.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5817), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening that opens the upper special winning opening based on the large winning opening opening information (A5819).

When the game control device 100 is a jackpot for opening the special winning opening (the result of A5819 is "Y").
)), clear the upper special prize opening fraudulent prize number area (A5820), save the fraud monitoring outside flag in the RWM upper special prize fraud monitoring period flag area (A5821), and fanfare/
In order to shift to the processing during the interval, "3" is set as the processing number (A5824).
If it is not a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening (the result of A5819 is "N"), the lower special winning opening fraud number area is cleared (A5822), and the fraud monitoring period flag area of the RWM lower special winning opening is outside the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and "3" is set as the process number to shift to the fanfare/interval process (A5824).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5
825), and executes the processing transition setting processing during fanfare/interval (A5826),
The process of displaying the special figure 2 ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (A5
The result of 805 is “N”), and it is determined based on the small hit flag 2 whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) ( A5827). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5828). When the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (the result of A5828 is "Y
)), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5829), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5830).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5831) and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A58).
32). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5834). In addition,
Because the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the small hit, this hit design command corresponds to the small hit design. On the other hand, if the current special figure 2 variation display game is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5828 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the processing of steps A5829 to A5832, and issues a command from the winning symbol command area. A winning symbol is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5834).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes an effect command setting process (A5836). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is a high probability state (A5837). If not in high probability state (
The result of A5837 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (OFF data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838), and the second gaming state is informed that it is right-handed. In order to turn off the display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5839). If there is a high probability state (A
The result of 5837 is "Y"), the signal related to the right-handing instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and the second gaming state informing that it is right-handed In order to light the display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5841).

After the steps A5839 and A5841, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small hit for opening the upper special winning opening (A5842). If it is a small hit to open the upper special winning opening (the result of A5842 is “Y”), the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A5843),
Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area for upper prize winning (A5844),
Toku-zu 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is executed (A5847), and Toku-zu 2 displaying processing ends. If it is not a small hit that opens the upper prize hole (the result of A5842 is "N")
That is, in the case of a small hit that opens the lower special winning opening, the lower large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A5845), and the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area ( (A5846), special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing is executed (A5847)
), the process of displaying the special map 2 ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is “N”), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5848). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5848 is “N”), the process moves to step A5856.

When the probability change is high (the result of A5848 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849), and executes effect command setting processing (A5850). .. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5851), and the left-hand instruction command notification flag is cleared (A58).
52). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5853).
). If the special display 1 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5853 is “Y”), the process moves to step A5856.

When the special hitting 1 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5853 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5).
854). Then, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8) for notifying that it is right-handed
In order to turn off -D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5855), and the change in special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5).
856). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 2 normal process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. In the special figure 2 normal process shift setting process 1, "0" is set as the process number to shift to the special figure 2 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 displaying process and the special figure 2 displaying process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of a big hit (on data of one big hit signal) in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area. (A5902), the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM is cleared (A5903).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A
5904), save the special map low probability & no time saving flag in the special map game mode flag area (
A5905). By setting the special map low probability & no time saving flag, the hit probability becomes low,
It will be in a state without time saving (no longer in time saving). Then, the production control device 30 at the time of power failure recovery
The command output to 0 saves the probability information command (
(Low probability) is saved (A5906), and the high-probability variation number area that holds the high-probability variation number in the RWM is cleared (A5907).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the big hit information in the special figure status area (A59).
08), clear the high-probability final fluctuation flag area holding the high-probability final fluctuation flag in the RWM (A5909). Then, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8) that saves the signal (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A5910) and notifies that it is right-handing. In order to turn on -D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A5912), and creates a special figure 2 abnormal number area in which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is held in the RWM. 0 clear (A5913), 0 in the special figure 1 fluctuation number area that holds the special figure 1 fluctuation number in the RWM
It clears (A5914), clears the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer area that holds the value of the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer in the RWM (A5915), and finishes the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing.

[Special figure 1 Small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing]
Next, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (A
5744) will be described in detail. FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets "7" as a process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare process (A6001a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on data of one big hit) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (on-data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and during the small hit in the special drawing status area. The information is saved (A6006a). Furthermore, the small hitting display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the special figure 1 small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 Small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing]
Next, in the special figure 2 displaying process, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A
5847) will be described in detail. FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit small fanfare processing transition setting processing.

Special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing, "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing (Fig. 60A) is "special figure 2" (special symbol 2) Since the same processing as the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle processing shift setting processing respectively correspond to steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. Figure 61 shows the fanfare
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during an interval.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A610).
1). Since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing (A5903), it is 0 before the big hit operation this time. Thereafter, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6102), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the big hit medium processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6105). Here, 0 is set as the initial value in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (=21). In the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing, a value larger than 0 and smaller than the upper limit value may be used as an initial value instead of 0 (that is,
Start with the value in the middle). Further, it is possible to have a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated for one of the upper and lower major winning openings, and the pattern is opened only once for the other, or both the upper and lower major winning openings are opened and closed. It may be a pattern in which the above is repeated or a pattern in which it is opened only once.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds (A6106). Then, "4" is set as the process number in order to shift to the process during the opening of the special winning opening (A6107), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6108). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6108 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save in the timer area (A6110). Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6108 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. The data is saved in the area (A6112).

Next, the game control device 100, based on the special winning opening opening information, determines whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (A6113). If it is a big hit that opens the top jackpot (
The result of A6113 is "Y"), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is executed (A6114).
), and ends the fanfare/interval processing. If it is not a big hit to open the upper special winning opening (the result of A6113 is "N"), that is, if it is a big hit to open the lower special winning opening,
The special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is executed (A6115), and the fanfare/interval processing ends. In the present embodiment, there are two types, a big hit that opens only the upper special winning opening and a big hit that opens only the lower special winning opening. However, a big hit that opens both the upper special winning opening and the lower large winning opening is provided. A configuration is also possible.

[Prize winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (A6114) in the fanfare/interval process will be described. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1.

The game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and in the special winning opening solenoid output data area of the RWM. , The special winning opening solenoid 39b is turned on, the upper special winning opening on data is saved (A6202a), the special winning opening count number is cleared (A6203a),
The special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Processing setting process 2 during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 (A6115) in the fanfare/interval process will be described. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2.

The game control device 100 saves the signal related to the opening of the lower prize opening (ON data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6201b), and in the RWM big winning opening solenoid output data area. , The lower special winning opening solenoid 38b is turned on, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved (A6202b), the special winning opening count number is cleared (A6203b),
The special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, the special winning opening opening process in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process (A3212)
, A3315) will be described in detail. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares for the mid-hit processing control pointer (A63).
01), it is determined whether or not the value of the loaded big hit mid-process control pointer is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (for example, 21) (A6302). When the value of the big hit medium processing control pointer is less than the big hit operation end value (the result of A6302 is "N"), the big hit medium processing control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the processing according to the big hit medium processing control pointer is performed. The operation shift setting process is executed (A6304), and the special winning opening opening process is ended.

When the value of the mid-hit processing control pointer is greater than or equal to the big hit operation end value (result of A6302 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6305). If the number of rounds (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare/interval processing is the final round number (for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R),
It can be determined that it is the final round.

When it is not the final round (result of A6305 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306) and executes an effect command setting process (A6308). When it is the final round (result of A6305 is "Y"), the ending command is prepared as a production command (A6307), and production command setting processing is executed (A6308).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (
(A6309), "5" is set as the process number in order to shift to the special winning opening remaining ball process (A6309).
A6310). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A63).
11). If the special display 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special display 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is set to the special display 1 game processing timer. Save to area (A6313). If the special display 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6311 is “N”), this processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (A6314), and the remaining ball processing time is set to the special drawing 2 game processing timer area. Save to (A
6315).

After the steps A6313 and A6315, the game control device 100 turns off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, so the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6316). The process of opening the special winning opening is ended.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit operation transition setting process (A6304) in the process of opening the special winning opening will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit operation shift setting process.

The game control device 100 first performs a branch using the mid-hit processing control pointer (A640).
1). It is also possible to use the value before the +1 update in step A6303 for the processing control pointer during the big hit, instead of the current value. When the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number, a wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the big hit mid-process control pointer is set (A
6402), off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6403).
).

When the value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is odd, the gaming control device 100 sets the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the processing control pointer during the big hit (A6404). For example, during the big winning opening opening time, the processing control pointer during the big hit is 1 to 19 (the processing control pointer during the big hit is 1-1
It is 200 msec in the case of 9) and 25000 msec in the case of the big hit medium processing control pointer 21 (big hit medium processing control pointer=21). The special winning opening opening time of 200 msec is used in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed for a short time during one round. Subsequently, the upper special winning opening ON data for turning on the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6405). As a result, the special winning opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short time. If the lower special winning opening repeats opening and closing for a short period of time, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area, or the lower large winning opening ON data and the upper large winning opening ON A configuration that saves both data is also possible.

After the steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6406). When it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6406 is "Y"), the set time (wait time or special winning opening opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). When it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6406 is "N"), that is, when it is the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408). ).

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the special winning opening remaining ball process (A3213) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing
, A3316) will be described in detail. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (the result of A6501 is "N"), the test signal output is the signal related to the end of opening the special winning opening (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal). The data is saved in the data area (A6502), the special winning opening opening information and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6503), and "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A6504). ). As a result, the fanfare/interval processing, the special winning opening opening processing, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round. The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round until the special winning opening remaining ball processing time and the interval time elapse.

Game control device 100, when it is the final round (the result of A6501 is "Y"), executes the big hit end process transition setting process for making a transition to the big hit end process (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Is set (A6506) and the process number is “6
Is set (A6507). Thereby, it is possible to shift to the big hit ending process. The length of the ending period is the sum of the ending time and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.

After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A6508). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A6508 is "Y"), the set process number ("3" or "6") is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6509), and set. The saved time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

When the game control device 100 is not the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is "N"), that is, when it is the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the process number ("3" or "
6") is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), and the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512).
), the big winning hole remaining ball processing ends.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the big hit ending process transition setting process (A6505) in the special winning opening remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process shift setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area ( A6601), clear the special winning opening count number area holding the special winning opening count number in the RWM (A6602), and clear the round number area (A6603). Then, the round number upper limit value area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit value information area is cleared (A6605), the special winning opening opening information area is cleared (A6606), and the big hit mid-process control pointer area is cleared. (A6607).

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as a process number to return to the normal process of special figure 1 (A6701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6702).
.. Then, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (one big hit off data and three big hit off data) in the external information output data area (A6703), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit. Continuously output the two jackpot signals) to the external information output data area (A6704).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signal regarding the end of the big hit is, for example, the off data of the condition device operating signal, the off data of the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, and the off data of the special symbol per signal. Then, the signal related to the start of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal. .. After that, the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a number with a high probability in the game state display number area (
(A6708), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709)
, Save the number of lights off in the round LED pointer area (A6710). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712). Clear the area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6714). In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the big hit ends, it becomes a high probability state and a time saving state. Then, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6715). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A6716).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 jackpot end process. This special figure 2 game wait time value delays the determination of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12). Is set to. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 m, which is twice the interrupt period.
sec (that is, the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area is 2).

If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game processing (immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing (A1310 in FIG. 12) in which the special figure 1 big hit ending process is executed ( In A1311) of FIG. 12, since the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game has started (started within the timer interrupt process this time), the special figure 2 special figure 2
The floating display game may be a problem because it starts first. It should be noted that the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end process, and therefore remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1 normal processing during the special figure 1 game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) twice as long as the interrupt cycle, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further-
It is updated to 1 (decreased by 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”), and it is determined whether the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is started (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing). .. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether the variation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game has started (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a deviating symbol (forced termination or originally unchanged).

In addition, if there is no particular problem in the game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game after the jackpot state ends, the process of step A6717 is omitted and FIG. 2 The game wait time value may not be set.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A6801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A6802).
.. Then, save the signal related to the end of the big hit (1 big hit off data and 3 big hit off data) in the external information output data area (A6803), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit. Continuously output two jackpot signals) to the external information output data area (A6804).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal regarding the end of the big hit is, for example, the OFF data of the condition device operating signal, the OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the OFF data of the special symbol 2 signal. Then, a signal related to the start of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal. .. After that, the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a number with a high probability in the game state display number area (
A6808), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6809)
, The number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6810). Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812). Clear the area (A6813)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high-probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high-probability state (probability change state) after the big hit state ends (A6814). In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the big hit ends, it becomes a high probability state and a time saving state. Then, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability variation number is saved in the high probability variation number region for holding the high probability variation number (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A6816).

In addition, in the special figure 2 big hit ending process, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value. The special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, so they remain at 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game starts. If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied after the determination (in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. This is because it can be done.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, during the small hitting fanfare in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing (A
3215, A3318) will be described in detail. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during the small hit fanfare.

The game control device 100, first, the opening pattern of the special winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit,
Branch according to the special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the big winning opening by the small hit, stop symbol number (A4312a, A4312b) of the small hit and the small hit symbol (
A4313a, A4313b of the stop symbol pattern).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 prepares a small hitting opening command of the lower special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6902) and executes an effect command setting process ( A6903). Next, "8" is set as the process number (A69
04), save the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6905), and save the small hit opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) as the special winning opening time in the special figure 1 game process timer area (A6906). .. Then, the signal (start data of the special electric auditors 2 working signal) related to the start of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower special winning opening on-data is set in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6908).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening during opening command of the lower special winning opening as an effect command (A6909), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6910). Next, "8" is set as the process number (A6
911), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6912), and the small hit opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the opening time of the special winning opening (A6913). .. Then, the signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (ON data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower special winning opening on-data is set in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6915).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command of the upper special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6916), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6917). Next, "8" is set as the process number (A6
918), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6919), and the small hit opening time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the opening time of the special winning opening (A6920). .. Then, the signal related to the start of the small hitting operation (ON data of the special electric auditors product 1 in-operation signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the upper special winning opening on-data is set in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6922).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is special figure 2 small hit 3, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command of the upper special winning opening opening as an effect command (A6923) and executes an effect command setting process. (A6924). Next, "8" is set as the process number (A6
925), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and the small hit opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the opening time of the special winning opening (A6927). .. Subsequently, the signal (start data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal) relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper special winning opening on-data is stored in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6929).

After the steps A6908, A6915, A6922, and A6929, the game control device 100 clears the special winning hole count number area (A6930), and finishes the small hit fanfare medium processing.

As described above, for each type of the small hit stop design number or the small hit opening pattern corresponding to the small hit design (special drawing 1 small hit, special drawing 2 small hit 1, 2, 3), large open by small hit Winning mouth (
The upper prize hole or the lower prize hole) and the opening time of the prize hole (small hit opening time) are determined. In the present embodiment, the control pointer is not set and only the small hit opening pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once is set. However, as in the case of the big hit, the control pointer is set to open and close the special winning opening. There may be a repeating small hit opening pattern. Further, by setting "8" as the process number, it is possible to shift to the process during the small hit after the end of the process during the small hit fanfare.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, during the small hit in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing (A3216, A3
319) will be described in detail. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during the small hit.

The game control device 100 first prepares a small hit end screen command as an effect command (
A7001), effect command setting processing is executed (A7002). As a result, the effect control device 300 that has received the small hit end screen command can cause the display device 41 to display the small hit end screen.

Next, the game control device 100, the opening pattern of the special winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit,
Branch according to the special figure 2 small hits 1, 2, 3) (A7003).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7004) and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7005). , Small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7007), and the small hit mid-end process is ended.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the process number (A7008) and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7009). ), the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7011), and the small hitting medium process is ended.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2 or the special figure 2 small hit 3 the game control device 100 sets "9" as the process number (A7012), and in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save the processing number (A7013), small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (eg 800 mse
c) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Then, in order to turn off both the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A7015), and the small hit mid-end processing is ended.

By setting "9" as the process number, it is possible to shift to the small hit remaining ball process after the end of the small hit medium process.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, small hit remaining ball processing in the special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing (A3217,
A3320) will be described in detail. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of small hit remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (A7101). Special Figure 1 If it is a small hit in the variable display game (the result of A7101 is "Y")
), "10" is set as the process number (A7102), this process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7103), and the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec)
Is saved in the special processing 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

If the game control device 100 is not a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (result of A7101 is “N”), that is, if it is a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the process number is “10”.
Is set (A7105), and this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A71
06), the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

After the steps A7104 and A7107, the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation (off data of the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) as test signal output data. The area is saved (A7108), the special winning opening count area is cleared (A7109), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended. The process number is "10"
By setting, it is possible to shift to the small hit end processing after the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number in order to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (
(A7201), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A7202). Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7203), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Yes (A7204). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in a high probability state (A72).
07). When it is in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “Y”), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). When it is not in the high probability state (result of A7207 is “N”), the signal related to left-handed instruction (off data of launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as step A6717 of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (FIG. 67),
8 msec, which is twice as long as the interrupt cycle (2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as the special figure 2 game wait time value. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number in order to return to the special process 2 normal process (
(A7301), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7302). Then, save the signal about the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7303), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area Then (A7304), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7305). Further, the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning probability is in a high probability state (A73).
08). If it is in the high probability state (result of A7308 is “Y”), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A7308 is “N”), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A730).
9), save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A7310), and the special figure 2
The small hit ending process ends.

For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit ending process (FIG. 68), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
Next, the symbol variation control process in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process (A3220,
Details of A3323) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

In the game control device 100, the special figure variation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is a changing flag (a flag indicating changing). It is checked whether or not (A7401). If it is changing, the changing flag is saved in the change control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

Then, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402), and if the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402) The result is "Y"), and the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined in the fluctuation control table (A3219, A3322). further,
Of the special maps 1 and 2, the blink control timer for the special map to be controlled (for example, special map 1) is-
The value is updated by 1 (A7404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (A7405).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (result of A7405 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area (A7408).
). If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (result of A7405 is “Y”), the blink control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the control target blink control timer area (A7406). Furthermore, of the special maps 1 and 2, the special map to be controlled (for example, the special map 1
) Related variable symbol number is updated by +1 and saved in the target variable symbol number area (A740
7), the display data corresponding to the value of the changing symbol number area of the target is acquired (A7408).
After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process ends.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6A, the variable display game in which the non-illuminated symbol (changing symbol number=0) and the illuminated symbol (changing symbol number=1) are repeated is a special object display to be controlled. Device (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52). The initial value of the changing symbol number is set to 0, which indicates a non-illuminated symbol in FIG. 5 (A5207a, A5207b).
..

On the other hand, if the special figure changing flag is not the changing flag, the game control device 100 (A7).
The result of 402 is "N"), and the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the special figure of the control target (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target stop symbol area (stop symbol number) is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol fluctuation control process is ended.

In this way, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6A, of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure display (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display) to be controlled is displayed. In the device 52), the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number will be displayed. In the stop symbol area, a stop symbol number is saved corresponding to a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (A5324, A).
5424).

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the round display unit 53 provided in the collective display device 50,
Special figure 1 reservation indicator (memory indicator) 54, 1st game state indicator 55, 2nd game indicator 5
6 and other settings relating to the drive of the segment LEDs.

First, the game control device 100 is a special figure 1 in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 54 is defined.
A reservation number table is set (A7501), display data corresponding to the reservation number of special figure 1 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special display 1 reservation indicator (A7502).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 53 is defined (A7503), acquires the display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, and sets it in the segment area of the round display unit 53. Save (A7504).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the first game state display section 55 is defined (A7505). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number in the game state display number area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display section 55 (A7506). Thereby, the high probability state or the low probability state can be displayed on the first game state display section 55.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 56 is defined (A7507). Further, the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 in the game status display number 2 area is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game status display portion 56 (A7508), and the segment LED editing processing is ended. This allows
In the second gaming state display portion 56, it can be displayed that the game is right-handed or left-handed.

In addition, in the case of providing the third game state display unit 57 indicating that the variable display game is being suspended corresponding to a modification described later, the game control device 100 displays the third game state display unit 57. A game state display table in which modes are defined is set, display data corresponding to whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is acquired, and the third game state display unit 5 is acquired.
The data may be saved in the 7-segment area.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet irregularity monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In the game control device 100, first, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is judged whether or not the magnetism is detected (A
7601).

When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A7601 is “Y”), the game control device 100,
That is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet irregularity monitoring timer that measures the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (A7602), and it is determined whether the timer has timed up (A7603).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A7603 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer ( (A7604), the magnet irregularity notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (A7605).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet injustice notification command as an effect command (A7606), and prepares a magnet injustice occurrence flag indicating that magnet injustice has occurred as a magnet injustice flag (A7607). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A7613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not turned on (the result of A7601 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. Yes (A7608). If the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A7609). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is 0 (A7610). Even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (
When the result of A7603 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A7609.

When the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7610 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet injustice monitoring process.

Further, the game control device 100, when the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is 0 (the result of A7610 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the injustice notification period Is completed or if no fraudulent notification has been given from the beginning,
A command for ending the magnet fraudulent notification is prepared as an effect command (A7611).

Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud cancellation flag as the magnet fraud flag (
(A7612), it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag area (A7613).

Then, when the prepared magnet illegal flag matches the value of the magnet illegal flag area (the result of A7613 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet illegal monitoring processing. on the other hand,
When the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (the result of A7613 is “N”), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (A7614).
), the effect command setting process is executed (A7615). Then, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
Next, the details of the board radio frequency irregularity monitoring processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. In the board electric wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the electric wave sensor 62 (board electric wave sensor) of the game board, and the start or end of the illegality notification is set.

In the game control device 100, first, the radio sensor 62 is turned on, that is, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I/F 121. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A77
01). When the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A7701 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A7702).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave irregularity notification command as an effect command (A7703), and prepares a board radio wave irregularity flag indicating that the board radio wave irregularity has occurred as a board radio wave irregularity flag (A7704). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (A7709). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, in the case of radio fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, in the gaming control device 100, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A7701 is "N
That is, when no abnormal radio wave is detected, if the radio wave injustice notification timer that defines the notification time of radio wave injustice is not 0, -1 is updated (A7705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is 0 (A7706). When the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7706 is "N")
That is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is terminated.

Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7706 is “Y”), that is, when the game control apparatus 100 has timed up or has already timed out, the fraud notification period Is completed or if no fraudulent notification has been given from the beginning,
A command for ending radio wave fraud notification is prepared as a performance command (A7707). Further, a board radio wave fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7708), and it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (the result of A7709 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing.
If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is "N"), the prepared board radio wave flag is saved in the board radio wave flag area (A7710), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7711). Then, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. In the external information editing processing, payout command transmission processing (A1305), winning opening switch/state monitoring processing (A13)
08), magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1313), based on the monitoring results in the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (A1314), create information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device. Then, the process of setting in the output buffer is performed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A7801). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"),
It is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A7802).
.. When the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A7802 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the OFF data of the security signal is output as the external information output data. Save to area (A7804).

The game control device 100, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A7801 is “Y”), or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (result of A7802 is “Y”),
The ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

If the security signal control timer is not 0 after the steps A7804 and A7806, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A7807), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up or not). The determination is made (A7808). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1026 of the main process).
). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (result of A7808 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A7809). If the security signal control timer is not 0 (result of A7808 is "N"), ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring, the game control device 100 (the result of A7809 is “N”)
Then, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). When frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (result of A7809 is “Y”), ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and then the process proceeds to step A7811. When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A7811 is “Y”), ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (the result of A7811 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet malfunction is occurring (A7813). It should be noted that it can be determined that the magnet malfunction is occurring when the magnet malfunction flag is saved in the magnet malfunction flag area. When the magnet malfunction is not occurring (the result of A7813 is “N”), it is further determined whether the board radio malfunction is occurring (A7814). It should be noted that it can be determined that the board radio wave irregularity is occurring when the board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area.

If the board radio wave is not occurring, the game control device 100 (the result of A7814 is “N”)
Further, it is determined whether or not a special winning opening fraud is occurring (A7815). If the fraudulent winning flag relating to the special winning opening (upper special winning opening or lower special winning opening) is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the special winning opening fraud is occurring. When the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal variation (abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game) is occurring ( A7816). In addition, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal variation is occurring. Toku-zu 2 When abnormal fluctuation is not occurring (The result of A7816 is "N
"), off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7).
817).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet malfunction is occurring (the result of A7813 is “Y
)), when the board radio wave is being generated (the result of A7814 is “Y”), the special winning opening is being generated (the result of A7815 is “Y”), or there is an abnormal change in special figure 2. If it is occurring (result of A7816 is "Y"), ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7818), and ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (A7819). Depending on the setting of on-data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

After the steps A7817 and A7819, the gaming control device 100 edits the starting opening 1 signal (A7820), starting opening 2 signal (A7821), and main prize ball signal editing processing (A7).
822), the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (A7823) is executed, and the external information editing process is ended. The starting port 1 signal editing process is a process when the starting port 1 switch 36a is input, and the starting port 2 signal editing process is a process when the starting port 2 switch 37a is input.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening 1 signal editing process (A7020) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening 1 signal editing process.

The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (A7901). The minimum value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0.
Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (A7902).

If the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 (A79).
The result of 02 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the number of times the starting port 1 signal is output is 0 (A7903).
). If the number of times the start port 1 signal is output is not 0 (the result of A7903 is “N”),
The number of times of starting port 1 signal output is updated by -1 (A7904), and the initial value of the starting port 1 signal output control timer is saved in the starting port 1 signal output control timer area (A7905).

The starting port 1 signal output control timer initial value is a time (eg, 128 ms) obtained by adding the time of the on state (for example, high level) of the starting port 1 signal and the time of off state (for example, low level).
ec).

After that, the game control device 100 saves ON data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7907), and ends the starting opening 1 signal editing processing.

Further, the game control device 100, when the number of times the starting opening 1 signal is output is 0 (A7903).
Result of "Y"), OFF data for turning off the starting port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7908), and the starting port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (
The result of A7902 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the start opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (A7906). The fact that the start-port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the starting mouth 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A7906 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 outputs ON data for turning on the starting mouth 1 signal to external information of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A7907), and the starting port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

Further, when the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A7906 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 outputs OFF data for turning OFF the starting opening 1 signal for the external device. The data is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A7908), and the starting port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

[Starting port 2 signal editing process]
Next, the starting port 2 signal editing process (A7021) in the external information editing process is merely a replacement of "starting port 1" with "starting port 2" in the starting port 1 signal editing process. The drawing is omitted.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A7022) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize to a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) to an external device. Processing.

If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 first updates -1 (A8001). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A8002).

If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 (A8
The result of 002 is “Y”), and it is further determined whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (A8003).

Then, the game control device 100, if the number of main prize ball signal output is not 0 (A80
The result of No. 03 is "N"), the number of main prize ball signal output times is updated by -1 (A8004), and the initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is saved in the main prize ball signal output control timer area (A80).
05). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the ON state of the main prize ball signal (for example,
Time (eg, high level) and time of off state (eg, low level) added (eg,
128 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the RWM to ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal.
It is saved in the external information output data area of (A8007), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. When the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is 0 (the result of A8003 is “Y”),
Off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8008), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (result of A8002 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section. Is determined (A8006). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section (result of A8006 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the on-data for turning on the main prize ball signal to RWM.
It is saved in the external information output data area of (A8007). When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A8006 is “N”), OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A8008), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design decision number signal editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the symbol decision number signal editing process. The symbol determination frequency signal editing process is a process of outputting a symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to an external device.

The game control device 100 first updates -1 if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (A8101). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0, the game control device 100 (A
The result of 8102 is “Y”), and it is further determined whether or not the number of times the symbol determination frequency signal is output is 0 (A8103).

Then, the game control device 100, when the number of times the symbol determination frequency signal is output is not 0 (A8
The result of 103 is "N"), the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is updated by -1 (A8104), and the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer saves the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value (A).
8105). The symbol confirmation frequency signal output control timer initial value is the ON state of the symbol confirmation frequency signal (
For example, it is a time (for example, 556 msec) obtained by adding a high level time (for example, 256 msec) and an off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 300 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 sets RW to ON data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal.
The data is saved in the external information output data area of M (A8107), and the symbol fixing frequency signal editing process is terminated. If the number of times the symbol determination frequency signal is output is 0 (the result of A8103 is "Y
)), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8108), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (result of A8102 is "N"), whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section or not. Is determined (A8106). It is to be noted that the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section, and the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is a predetermined time (eg 300 m
sec) or more.

When the symbol confirmation frequency signal output control timer is in the output ON section (result of A8106 is “Y”), the game control device 100 turns on data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal to R.
The data is saved in the external information output data area of the WM (A8107). If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (result of A8106 is “N”), OFF data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is external information output data of RWM. The image is saved in the area (A8108), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is terminated.

[Modification of control of game control device]
Below, the modification of the control (processing) of a game control apparatus is demonstrated. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, etc.), while one of the special figure variation display games (special figure 1 variation display game or special figure 2 variation display game) is changing, the other special figure variation display game When the special figure 2 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (a big hit or a small hit), one of the special figure variable display games is forced to end the variation (forced end) due to the miss result. However, as in the following modified example, in this case, regarding this one special figure variation display game, measurement of the variation time by the timer is interrupted and the game result is derived (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number). It is also possible to postpone the game and restart the interrupted one special figure variation display game after the end of the hitting operation for the other special figure variation display game (after the end of the big hit state or the small hit state).

Even during the interruption of the special figure variation display game, the variation itself of the special symbol (identification information) is apparently continued on the display device 41 and the special figure variation display section (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52). (Note that it is also possible to temporarily stop the fluctuation of the special symbol during the interruption). When the fluctuation apparently continues, according to another concept, it can be said that the fluctuation time is extended for one special figure by the time of the hit operation (time in the big hit state or the small hit state) with respect to the other special figure. ..

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (A1310) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process according to the modification. FIG. 82 shows an addition of the process of step S8200 to FIG. Steps A3201 to A3220 of FIG. 82
The processing up to this point has the same contents as in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 is a special figure 1 showing that the special figure 1 variable display game is being suspended.
It is determined whether the game interruption flag is set (S8200). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is "N"), the processes of steps A3201 to A3220 are executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, the game control device 100 (S82).
If the result of 00 is "Y"), the special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is prepared without performing the processing of steps A3201 to A3218 (A3219),
The symbol variation control process relating to the special figure 1 display device 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. In addition,
By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself will be apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modification)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process (A1311) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game process according to the modification. 83 is obtained by adding the process of step S8300 to FIG. 33. Steps A3301 to A3323 of FIG. 83
The processing up to this point has the same contents as in FIG.

The game control device 100 first of all, the special figure 2 showing that the special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended.
It is determined whether the game interruption flag is set (S8300). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is "N"), the processes of steps A3301 to A3323 are executed.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S83
00 is “Y”), the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared without performing the processing of steps A3301 to A3321 (A3322),
The symbol variation control process relating to the special figure 2 display device 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is ended. In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. In addition,
By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself will be apparently continued on the special figure 2 display 52.

[Special figure 1 Processing during fluctuation (modification)]
A modification of the special figure 1 mid-changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 changing process according to the modification.
In FIG. 84, the processes of steps A5311 to A5319 of FIG.
11 to S8416 are added. Steps A5301 to A5 of FIG. 84
The processing of 310 and steps A5320 to A5325 are the same as those in FIG.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not off (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and when the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A5
309 is “N” and A5310 is “Y”), and steps S8411 to S84
By the processing of 16, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result fluctuates and stops, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not off and the special figure 2 is changing, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (S8).
411). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of S8411 is "Y")
), the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer=4 ms
ec) is determined (S8412). That is, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. To do.

When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec, the game control device 100 (
The result of S8412 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing (started in the current timer interrupt processing) immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing. ) And becomes 0, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be ended with the result of falling. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, and the process moves to step A5324.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not missing (S8411)
Is "N"), or the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (
The result of S8412 is "N"), and the special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8413). The special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Then, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8415). Decorative special drawing 2 Production control device 3 which received the interruption command
00 can set an effect for interrupting the decorative special map 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (decreases by 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413),
Since the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process this time, the special figure 2 game process timer is replaced by -1 here instead.
It is updated (reduction of 4 msec). As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the special figure 2 game processing timer is excessively increased by 4 msec when the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (see FIG. 105).

After the step S8416, the game control device 100, similarly to FIG. 53, a step A532.
The processing from 0 to A5325 is executed. Note that, in the special figure 1 changing process according to the modified example, unlike FIG. 53, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process according to the modification.
In FIG. 85, the processing of steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 54 is deleted, and step S85
11 to S8513 are added. Steps A5401 to A5 of FIG. 85
Since the processing of 410 and steps A5420 to A5425 is the same as that of FIG. 54, its description is omitted.

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not off (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A5
409 is “N” and A5410 is “Y”), and steps S8511 to S85
By the processing of 13, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not off and the special figure 1 is changing, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. It is set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag, the above-mentioned step S8200
It is used to judge. Then, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing the interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and effect command setting processing is executed (S8513). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 interruption command can set the effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

The game control device 100, after step S8513, similarly to FIG. 54, step A542.
The processing from 0 to A5325 is executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 changing process according to the modified example, unlike FIG. 54, the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing (modification)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process according to the modification. 86 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. Since the processing from steps A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 86 has the same contents as in FIG. 67, description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6716, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (S8617). Special Figure 2 If the game interruption flag is set,
It can be determined that the special display 2 variable display game is suspended. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8617 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in RWM is cleared (S8620), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8617 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8618), and execute effect command setting processing (S86).
19). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621). , The special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the timekeeping (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (S).
The result of 8300 is "N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

Note that the process of step S8621 is the same as the process of step A6717 of FIG. 67, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends in the special figure 1 variable display game. (Restart) is set in order to delay it at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), which is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt period. As a result, with the timer interrupt processing after the jackpot state ends in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game will be started (restarted) within the current timer interrupt process before the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, after the jackpot state ends,
If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A8621 is omitted, and the special figure 2 game wait is performed. It is not necessary to set the time value.

Further, the change start determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is determined at the time of the next timer interruption process based on the special figure 2 game wait time value, but the decoration special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100.
This is because the interrupt time (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing (modified example)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 big hit ending process according to the modification. 87 is obtained by adding the processing of steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. 68. The processing from steps A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 87 has the same contents as in FIG.

After step A6816, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (S8717). Special Figure 1 If the game interruption flag is set,
It can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8717 is “N”), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (S8720), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of S8717 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8718), and execute effect command setting processing (S87).
19). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for resuming decoration special figure 1 can execute the process for resuming the variable display game for decoration special figure 1. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is ended.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the timekeeping (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (S).
The result of 8300 is "N"). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is restarted.

In addition, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set in the special figure 2 big hit ending process.
This is because both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started (restarted) within the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing according to the modification. 88 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. The processing from steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 72 has the same contents as in FIG.

When the gaming control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A7207 is “Y”), or
After Step A7209, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (S8).
810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8810 is “N”), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8811), and execute effect command setting processing (S88).
12). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S
8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the small hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. The process of step S8814 is similar to step A7210 of FIG. 72. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the special figure 2 variable display game which has been interrupted is restarted.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing according to the modification. 89 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. 73. The processing from steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 73 has the same contents as in FIG.

The game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A7308 is “Y”), or
After Step A7310, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (S8).
911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of S8911 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of S8911 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes effect command setting processing. Yes (S8913). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decoration special figure 2 variable display game. After that, special map 2
The game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted can be restarted.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above-described modified example of the control of the game control device 100 (a configuration for restarting the interrupted special figure variation display game). In the case of a basic configuration (a configuration that is not a modified example) in which the special figure variation display game is forcibly terminated, the processing relating to the interruption and restart of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 90
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the reference numeral (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B1001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B1002, B1002,
1003) and the interrupt is permitted (B1004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B1).
008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B1002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Rendering button input processing is executed (B1009). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting an operation such as a change in the brightness of the LED or liquid crystal by the player, or a change in volume (B1011). Then, the random number update process for updating the random number such as the effect random number is executed (B1011), the received command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed, and the corresponding received command check process is executed (B1012). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display edit processing of updating various data according to the contents displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B10).
14).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
1015). When it is not the frame switching timing (result of B1015 is “N”), the processing of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. When it is the frame switching timing (result of B1015 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B1
016). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 second, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling the performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, the solenoid is driven to execute the accessory motion effect.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B1008, if the above-mentioned processing of B1019 is completed. After that, the processing from B1008 to B1019 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check process (B1012) in the above-described main process (FIG. 90) will be described below with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103
), the contents of the received command buffer in RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer into the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

And production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command to 32
It is configured to store up to individual pieces. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read in the order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines that the result of B1106 is "Y" when the copying is completed.
]), the received command content of the analysis command area is loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 91) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 shows the production control device 30.
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a received command analysis process executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is a MODE section (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are arranged in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part is within the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
Result of "Y"), and further, the ACTION part for the MODE part determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 50). And MO
If the DE portion represents a variable command (result of B1205 is “Y”), variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the hit command (B
1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to a performance during a big hit or a small hit, and is, for example, a hit symbol command, a round command, a small hit opening command, or the like. .. When the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the hit system command (B12
The result of 07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (B).
1209). There are decorative special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 43A) and decorative special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 43B) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern as the symbol-based commands. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol type command (the result of B1209 is “Y”),
The symbol command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol-based command (B12
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the single-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a one-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (B12
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The read-ahead symbol system command includes the aforementioned read-ahead stop symbol command (see FIG. 31).
A3111). Then, when the MODE part represents a prefetching symbol type command (B
The result of 1213 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol type command processing is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then the MODE section determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (B1215). The look-ahead variation system command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 31). If the MODE part indicates a prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), prefetching variable system command processing is executed (B1216).
), the received command analysis processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. When the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or the AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 93A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the single-shot command processing executed by the production control device 300. FIG. 93B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the single-shot system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302) and terminates the single-shot system command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (
When the result of B1303 is “Y”), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the single-shot system command process ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command. (B1305). If the MODE part indicates a command for power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “Y”), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (if there is a special figure game interruption flag that was backed up in the RWM), the command for restoring power failure is The 1-variation display game is being suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is being suspended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command at the time of power failure recovery (
The result of B1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1
The result of 307 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310),
Terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131).
2), single-shot system command processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is the game control device 100.
Since it is not transmitted from the device, the processing of steps B1311, B1312 may be omitted. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit) In the case), the special figure start information 2 switch process (FIG. 30) is also used to perform the special figure hold information determination process (preread process, pre-determination process), and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is issued from the game control device 100. May be transmitted.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (B1315). Note that, as the error/unauthorized command, for example, a fraud command (A2108), a fraud cancellation command (A2116), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (A2414), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (A2418), a state off Command (A2
504) and a status on command (A2507). If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), error/illegal setting processing for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE part does not represent an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a production mode switching command. The determination is made (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1).
318) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command for the production mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the command for the symbol stop is represented. (B1319). As commands for stopping the symbols, there are a decoration special figure 1 stop command and a decoration special figure 2 stop command. Then, when the MODE part indicates the command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If it is not a normal command (result of B1320 is “N”), the single-shot system command processing is ended.

When the command is a normal command (result of B1320 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs stop setting for stopping the corresponding special drawing (decoration special drawing 1 or decoration special drawing 2) (B132).
1). Then, if all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 have stopped, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single shot system command processing is ended. In addition, the game state flag is a flag that can indicate other states such as changing, big hit, and small hit.

Production control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for the symbol stop (
The result of B1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a command for suspension of fluctuation (B1323). The commands for suspending variation are the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 85) and the decoration special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 84). When the MODE part indicates a command for suspension of fluctuation (the result of B1323 is “Y”)
Then, the variable interruption setting process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command for suspension of variation (
The result of B1323 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a command for restarting fluctuation (B1325). The commands for resuming fluctuations are the above-mentioned decoration special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 87) and the decoration special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 86). When the MODE part indicates a command for suspension of fluctuation (the result of B1325 is “Y”)
Then, the variable restart setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot command process ends.

Even if the command for suspending fluctuation is not received, if a hit command related to the effect (big hit or small hit) of the decorative special figure change display game of one of special figures 1 and 2 is received, The effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the other decorative special figure variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation restart setting process.

[Variation interruption setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the variable interruption setting process (B1324) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 93) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the received variation interruption command is a normal command (B1401). If it is not a normal command (the result of B1401 is "N
)), and ends the fluctuation interruption setting process. If the command is normal (the result of B1401 is "
Y”), it is determined whether or not the command is received when the power is turned on (B1402). When the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is “Y”), the received command (
In response to the decoration special figure 1 interruption command or the decoration special figure 2 interruption command), the interruption flag of the decoration special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that the decoration special figure variable display game is being interrupted is set. Set (B1403).

If the command is not received when the power is turned on (result of B1402 is “N”), the effect control device 300 is changing the target design (decoration special drawing 1 or decoration special drawing 2) to be interrupted from now on. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the variable display game of the symbols to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). When the target symbol is not changing (the result of B1404 is “N”), the change interruption setting process is ended. When the target symbol is changing (the result of B1404 is "Y")
, It is determined whether or not the received variation interruption command is a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (B
1405).

When the received command for variation interruption is the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets the interruption variation display of decoration special figure 1 (B14).
06). For example, on the display screen (display section) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed large in the center, a variable display for interruption is set so that it is moved to a corner and displayed in a reduced size. Alternatively, the variable display for interruption, which is displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual, may be set. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special map 1 indicating that the decoration special drawing 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1408).

When it is in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1409). Special decoration 2
When the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is “N”), the display device 41
In order to suggest the interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game by means of etc., display setting of the effect for interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is executed (B1410), and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

If the production control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “N”), that is,
In the high probability state, since the effect of the decoration special map 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, the display setting of the effect for interrupting the decoration special map 1 variable display game is not performed, and the fluctuation is interrupted. The setting process ends. If the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (B1
The result of 409 is “Y”), and since the jackpot effect of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, the display setting of the effect for interrupting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is not performed. The fluctuation interruption setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the received variation interruption command is not the decoration special figure 1 interruption command (result of B1405 is “N”), that is, if it is the decoration special figure 2 interruption command, the effect control device 300, the decoration special figure 2 The variable display for interruption is set (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, the variable display of the decorative special drawing 2 is largely enlarged at the center (main display,
If it was displayed normally, you can set the variable display for interruption that moves to the corner and display it in a small size, or you can set the variable display for interruption that is displayed with a higher transparency than usual. Good. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special map 2 indicating that the decoration special drawing 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the low probability state (B1413).

When the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is “N”), that is,
In the case of a high probability state, it is determined whether or not the result of the decorative special map 1 variable display game is a big hit (
B1414). When the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is suggested on the display device 41 or the like. Display setting of the effect for interruption is executed (B1415), and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

When the effect control device 300 is in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decorative special map 1 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. The variable interruption setting process is ended without performing the display setting of the effect for interruption of the display game. When the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is “Y”), the effect of the big hit of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Toku-zu 2 The display setting of the effect for interruption of the variable display game is not performed, and the variable interruption setting process is ended.

[Variation restart setting processing]
Details of the fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) in the above-described single-shot system command process (FIG. 93) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, production control device 300 determines whether or not the received command for restarting fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If it is not a normal command (the result of B1501 is "N
)), and ends the fluctuation restart setting process. If the command is normal (the result of B1501 is "
Y”), it is determined whether or not the received command for restarting fluctuation is the decorative special figure 1 restart command (B1502).

When the received command for resuming variation is the decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure 1 based on the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the display game is suspended (B1503). If the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of B1503 is “N”), the variable restart setting process ends.

When the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (result of B1503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B150).
5). The power failure recovery display is a display that indicates that the power failure has been recovered and that processing is being performed after the power failure is recovered. When the power outage restoration display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the change restart of the decorative special map 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restart of the decorative special map 1 variable display game for recovery) is set. (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is "
N”), and restart (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game according to the probability state is set (B1507).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the received command for restarting the variation is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (result of B1502 is “N”), that is, when it is the decoration special figure 2 restart command, the decoration special figure 2 It is determined whether the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted based on the interruption flag of (B1508). Decorative special map 2 If the variable display game is not suspended (B150
When the result of No. 8 is “N”), the fluctuation resumption setting process ends.

When the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (result of B1508 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 2 (B1509). Then, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B151).
0). When the power outage restoration display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is “Y”), the variation restart of the decorative special figure 2 for restoration according to the probability state (restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game for restoration) is set. (B1511). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is “N”), the restart (not for recovery) of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game according to the probability state is set (B151).
2).

Regarding the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, the probability state may change between when the interruption of the decorative special figure variation display game is started and when it is restarted. Therefore, when resuming, the display mode of the symbol differs depending on whether or not there is a probability state that the target symbol is preferentially displayed. For example, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during a low probability, it will be interrupted in a state where the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 continues to fluctuate in the corner of the display device 41, but if the probability is low at the time of resumption, the special figure 1
Is restarted in a state in which is displayed with a large priority in the center of the display device 41. If there is a high probability/shortening time when restarting, restart with the reduced design (reduced display).

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the prefetching symbol type command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described. FIG. 96 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading pattern system command processing performed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

As described above, in this embodiment, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is the game control device 1
Since it is not transmitted from 00, the process of step B1603 is basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit) in case of,
The game control device 100 is made to transmit a decoration special figure 2 hold number command, and step B16
You may make it perform the process of 03.

Rendering control device 300, after step B1602 and B1603, sets the prefetching variable system command reception waiting flag which shows that it is waiting to receive the prefetching variable system command (B160).
4). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. Then, the read-ahead symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the look-ahead variable system command process (B1215) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 97 shows the production control device 30.
9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetching variable system command processing executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variation-type command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. When waiting to receive a prefetching variable command (the result of B1701 is "
Y”), and clears the readahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board), the design of the latest pending information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2)
Of the pre-reading variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of (B1703), and the sub pre-reading variable command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part of the pre-reading variable system command (
B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the pre-read variation command ACT in the sub corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
The copy is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-sub-readahead variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT section is saved in the prefetch variable command area (special figure 1 preread variable command area or special figure 2 preread variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B170
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).
).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation-type command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half variation corresponding to the sub prefetch change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system,
Temporarily, without changing the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation.
Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or , If the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is “N”), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetching variable system command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the latest newly created hold is a failure (B1711). Production control device 300, if the latest hold is a win (the result of B1711 is "
N”), and calculates the total time until the latest pending special figure variation display game ends variation (B1
712). The total time also includes the stop symbol display time.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decorative special figure variation display game will be interrupted when the variation of the latest pending special figure variation display game ends (B1713). If the latest hold is the special figure 1 hold, the other decorative special figure variable display game is the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, for example, when the other decorative special figure variable display game is not running after the calculated total time, or when the other decorative special figure variable display game is out of sync, the other decorative special figure variable display game is displayed. It is determined not to suspend.

When the effect control device 300 is to interrupt the other decorative special figure variable display game (
The result of B1713 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not there is an execution plan of the prefetch effect for the suspension hold (B1714). Note that the suspension hold is a suspension corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, being scheduled to be executed includes that the prefetching effect is being executed. When there is a plan to execute the pre-reading effect for the suspension hold (the result of B1714 is “Y”), it is determined whether the pre-reading effect for the suspension hold is a notice of pending change (B1715).

Rendering control device 300, if the prefetching effect of suspension pending is not a notice of pending change (B1715).
Is “N”), and it is determined whether or not the effect replacement for the pre-reading effect of suspension interruption is in time (B1716). When it is impossible to forcibly end the prefetching effect already, it is determined that the effect replacement will not be in time (the replacement is not performed). When the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is “Y”), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the pending number so that the effect may be replaced (B1717).
..

Rendering control device 300, if the latest hold is out (result of B1711 is “Y”),
When the other decorative special figure variable display game is not interrupted (the result of B1713 is "
N”), if there is no plan to execute the prefetch effect for the suspension hold (the result of B1714 is “N”).
), if the pre-reading effect of suspending and suspending is a notice of pending change (the result of B1715 is “Y”), if the effect replacement is not in time (the result of B1716 is “N”), the effect is not replaced and the effect is directly changed in step B1718. Move to processing.

Next, the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target suspension information (latest suspension information) from the prefetching variable command area (B1718), and executes the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest suspension prefetching effect (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead notice effect is generated (B1720). When the pre-reading notice production of the latest hold occurs (the result of B1720 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice production that occurs is a production which starts immediately (B
1721). The production that starts immediately includes, for example, a notice of pending change. When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1722). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest pending look-ahead notice effect (B172).
The result of 0 is "N"), or when the prefetching notice effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (
The result of B1721 is "N"), as it is. The read-ahead variable command processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special figure holding information determination process (prefetching process, pre-determination process) is not performed in the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, the special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 holding) is performed. On the other hand, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) and the prefetch variable system command (prefetch variation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100. Therefore, the processes of steps B1715 to B1717 are basically not executed. However, when the special figure 2 variable display game is configured not to start immediately even if the special figure 2 starting memory is generated (for example, when the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit) In the case), the pre-reading symbol system command and pre-reading variable system command for special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 reservation) game control control equipment 1
It is also possible to transmit from 00 and execute the processing of steps B1711 to B1717.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) described above will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 receives the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is the above-mentioned outlier symbol, 2R probability variation symbol, 4R probability variation symbol, 8R probability variation symbol, 16R probability variation symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 92) will be described below with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

Production control device 300, the special figure type (special figure 1 of the fluctuation command which is received (fluctuation command)
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undetermined (B1901). When the special map type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as a case where a variable system command which is out of order is received but a symbol system command of a probability variation symbol is received. When the variable type command and the pattern type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”),
The variable command processing ends.

Rendering control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type is not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (fluctuation command) (B1.
904), the fluctuating effect setting process for setting the changing effect is executed (B1905). In addition,
There are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of prefetching effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variation system command process (FIG. 99) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special drawing type, and the effect mode is set (B2002), and the variation system command (
The MODE part of the (variable command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special map type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation is with reach, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type. Set the notice distribution group address table (B2004),
The MODE part of the variable-type command (variable command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Then, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (B2007
), the address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the variable system command is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (reach) is performed (B2009).
). After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the lottery for the notice (B2011). After that, the stop design of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the blemishes in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). If the power failure recovery display is not displayed (B20
The result of 13 is "N"), and the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is related to the symbol that is the main display (B2014). The variation this time is a decorative special figure variation display game executed by the variation system command this time. For example, when the variable display of the decoration special map 1 is largely enlarged (normal display) in the center of the display device 41, the special display 1 is the main display.

When the present variation is related to the symbol which is the main display (the result of B2014 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the variation effect (B2015) and the display setting of the notice effect. (B2016). Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special map type is set (B2017), and the voice number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special map variation corresponding to the special drawing type (B
2019), when there is a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) other than the first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed. (B20
20). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is “Y”), and when the change this time is not related to the symbol which is the main display (B
If the result of 2014 is “N”), that is, the fluctuation this time is the fluctuation during the power failure recovery display and is related to the design reduced in the corner of the display device 41, the flashy effect is not performed. The display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed without setting the variation effect or the notice effect (the processing from B2015 to B2018) (B2019).

[Modification of control of production control device]
A modified example of the control (processing) of the effect control device will be described below. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-described control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Variation interruption setting process (modified example)]
A modified example of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation interruption setting process according to the modification. 101 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps B1402, B1403, B1410, and B1415 from FIG. 94 and adding the processes of steps T2115, T2116, T2117, and T2118. Figure 10
In FIG. 1, the same steps as those in FIG.

The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in the low probability state (B14).
If the result of 08 is “Y”) and the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (B
The result of 1409 is "N"), and the freezing display setting of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is set (T2115). The fluctuating effect includes the fluctuating effect and the notice effect described above. Freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also perform display settings for a series of movies until freeze. Subsequently, display setting of the superimposed video (movie display of characters etc.) for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2116).
).

Also, the effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in the low probability state (
If the result of B1413 is "N") and the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the free display of the fluctuating effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. Settings are made (T2117). The fluctuating effect includes the fluctuating effect and the notice effect described above. Freeze includes, for example, freeze (stop) of a movie (moving image). Here, you may also perform display settings for a series of movies until freeze. Then, display setting of the superimposed image for freeze effect displayed on the display device 41 is performed (T2118).

In the above, the freeze effect is performed after receiving the decoration special figure interruption command.
The entertainment may be enhanced by performing an effect based on the prefetching command before receiving the decorative special figure interruption command and freezing at the same time as receiving the decorative special figure interruption command.

[Variation restart setting processing (modified example)]
A modified example of the variation restart setting process (B1326) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation restart setting process according to the modification. 102 replaces the processing of steps B1505 to B1507 and B1510 to B1512 of FIG. 95 with step T2.
The processing of 210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 is included. In FIG. 102, the same steps as those in FIG. 95 are designated by the same step numbers (reference numerals), and description thereof will be omitted.

After step B1504, effect control device 300 sets the change restart of the decoration special map 1 (restart of the decoration special drawing 1 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2210). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211).
.. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart of the decoration special map 1 (restart of the decoration special drawing 1 variable display game) in the reduced design (reduction display) is set (T221).
2).

When the effect control device 300 receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command, when the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of T2211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or more than a predetermined time ( T2213). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2213 is “Y”), the rewinding effect display setting and the reproduction speed are set (T2214), and the fluctuation resumption setting process ends. In the rewinding effect, the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is performed again on the display device 41 at a high reproduction speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is “N”), the time for the rewinding effect is insufficient, so that the restart effect display and the accessory driving are set using the electric auditors (T2215). ), the fluctuation restart setting process ends.

In addition, after the step B1509, the decoration special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets the variation restart of the decoration special figure 2 (restart of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game) according to the probability state (T).
2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). When the power failure restoration display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart of the decoration special drawing 2 (restart of the decoration special drawing 2 variable display game) in the reduced design (reduced display) is set (T2218). ).

Production control device 300, when the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of T2217 is "N")
), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (result of T2219 is “Y”), the rewinding effect display setting and the reproduction speed are set (T2220), and the fluctuation resumption setting process ends. In the rewinding effect, the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the display device 41 once again.
It is performed at a high playback speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (T2219)
Is "N"), and since the time for rewinding effect is insufficient, display of restart effect using the electric accessory and setting of accessory driving are performed (T2221), and the variable restart setting process ends.

[Operation and effect of the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 103 to 110, the operation and effect of the present embodiment (including modified examples) will be described. 103 to 110, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are abbreviated as the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the display device based on the establishment of the start condition.
When the result mode of the variable display game is a predetermined result mode (hit result mode including a small hit result mode and a big hit result mode), a predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) in which a game value can be given to the player Can occur.

The special figure 1 game process as the first control means executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning in the first start winning opening 36). Take control. In the special figure 2 game process as the second control means, the second start condition is satisfied (for example, the second start condition).
The execution control of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) is performed based on the winning of the start winning opening 37.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can both be in a running state (running state). Then, when one of the special display 1 variable display games and the special figure 2 variable display games has a hit result mode (predetermined result mode), the other variable display game is ended and the other change is displayed. The display game may be set as a result mode (FIGS. 53 and 54).
56A and 56B). Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become the hit result mode. If both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped in the hit result mode, the gaming machine 10 hits one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Since it can only be executed, a problem occurs.

As in the time chart of FIG. 103, a process (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 55A, FIG. 55B) of stopping the variable display of one of the variable display games in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 103)
), the process of forcibly ending the variable display of the other variable display game in the result mode can be executed (FIG. 53, FIG. 54, FIG. 56A, FIG. 56B). This allows the other variable display game to continue as long as possible. Further, the new variable display game of the other one is not started until the predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes the hit result mode (see special FIG. 1 in FIG. 35). Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. 36). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game become the hit result mode.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 104, when one of the variable display games has a hit result mode (a small hit result mode in FIG. 104), the execution time (fluctuation time) of the other variable display game is measured (measured). The other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special figure game processing timer (clocking means)) (variations of FIGS. 82, 83, 84, and 85). When the predetermined game state that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes the hit result mode ends, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special figure game processing timer (time measuring means) (FIG. 82). 83, and modified examples of FIGS. 86 to 89). As indicated by the hatched portion in FIG. 104, the other variable display game after resumption can be executed by the remaining variable time after the interruption (remaining time of the timer).

Further, since the other variable display game can be restarted even if interrupted, unlike the case where the other variable display game is forcibly stopped in the result mode, when the other variable display game has a hit result, the other variable display game is restarted. It is possible to generate a predetermined game state (small hit state, large hit state) by the display game, and it is possible to prevent a problem that damages the profit of the player. For example, when one of the variable display games derives the small hit result mode while the other variable display game that is the big hit result mode is being executed, the other variable display game is interrupted, but the small hit game by the one variable display game is performed. When the state ends, the other variable display game can be restarted to derive the jackpot result mode.

Furthermore, since the process of suspending the variable display of the other variable display game is executed when the process of stopping the variable display of the one variable display game in a hit result mode is executed, the variable display game of the other variable display game is executed as much as possible. Can continue. During the suspension of the other variable display game, if the identification information of the other variable display game is variably displayed, the apparent variation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM 111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes main processing and timer interrupt processing for the main processing. The present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 game processing (first control means, first control processing) has priority over the special figure 2 game processing (second control means, second control processing), and the special figure 1 game After the processing, the special figure 2 game processing is executed.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105(a), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 83) is executed. Since the game processing timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 is used to measure the execution time of the variable display game.
The game processing timer (time measuring means) is updated by the time of one interruption cycle (4 msec) (step A8416 in FIG. 84). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the special figure 2 variable display game after the restart of the fluctuation is additionally executed for the time corresponding to one interruption cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 105(b), when this timer is not updated, the interrupt period is 1 for the entire variable time (t1 before interruption+t2 after interruption) when updating. Batch time (4ms
The total fluctuation time increases by ec). On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, it is not necessary to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 106(a), the predetermined game state (small hit game state in FIG. 106) that occurs when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 106) is When ending, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed by the delay timer (delay means) for a predetermined time (wait time) (FIGS. 87 and 89). On the other hand, FIG.
As in the time chart of 06(b), when the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode ends, the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with a delay timer (delay means). By a predetermined time (wait time of 8 msec) (S86 in FIG. 86)
21, S8814 in FIG. 88). By setting the delay timer, it is possible to restart the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game by the timer interrupt processing after the hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game ends.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 107(a), the special figure 2 variable display game is not affected by the variable display state (stopped state, apparent variable state during interruption, etc.) of the special figure 2 variable display game. A delay timer (wait time of 8 msec) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt process for performing the ending process (the hit ending process of FIGS. 67, 72, 86, and 88) of the predetermined game state that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode, The special figure 2 variable display game by the special figure 2 game processing cannot be started (FIGS. 33 and 83). Then, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interrupt process after the ending process of the predetermined game state, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are executed. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started at the same time. In addition, at the timing of the ending process of the predetermined game state, the special figure 1
When the start memory and the special figure 2 start memory are already present (when the special figure 2 start memory is stored), or at this timing, the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 are won. When there is a winning, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 107(b), when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the hit result mode, the timer interrupt process after the ending process of the predetermined game state is performed without setting the delay timer. If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously started by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. it can.

Furthermore, when one of the variable display games of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped in a hit result mode, the remaining of the other variable display game with respect to the other variable display game. The processing corresponding to the variable time (value of the special figure game processing timer) may be performed (FIG. 8).
4 of S8412). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game end at the same timing, and at the same time the winning result is derived.

For example, based on the remaining fluctuation time of the other variable display game, the other variable display game is
Same timing as one variable display game that stops in the hit result mode (within the same interrupt process)
It is determined whether there is a possibility of ending with (S8412 of FIG. 84). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game processing executed after the special figure 1 game processing for stopping the special figure 1 variable display game in a hit result mode, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game may be zero. Whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 changing process is determined).

In the case where the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game stops in the hit result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result mode is a hit result mode, the interruption process for interrupting the Toku-zu 2 variable display game and postponing the stop of the variable display is executed in the Toku-zu 1 game process (the Toku-zu 1 changing process in FIG. 84). If the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the off result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game is in the off result mode in the special figure 2 game process (particularly during the special figure 2 changing process of FIG. 85). Perform processing to stop.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108(a), in a situation where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game have the possibility of deriving the hit result substantially simultaneously, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. By doing so, it is possible to perform an interruption process to postpone the stop of the variable display. Then, the derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game is prioritized, and the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 1 variable display game starts first. After the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game is derived (the apparent variable display stopped during the interruption), and the hit state by the special figure 2 variable display game (win) (Operation) is started, so that there is no disadvantage to the player. In addition,
Toku-zu 2 During the hit state (hit action) by the variable display game, Toku-zu 1 start memory (Toku-zu 1 hold)
Even if there is, the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started (the result of A3501 in FIG. 35 is “N”).
).

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 108(b), the special figure 2 variable display game has the same timing (within the same interrupt process) as the special figure 1 variable display game that derives the hit result (here, a small hit).
If the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the disengagement result mode when there is a possibility that the process ends, the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game as it is in the disengagement result mode is performed.
No problem occurs even if the result mode of this deviation is derived as it is. When the process of stopping the special display 2 variable display game in the off result mode is performed, the stop display time of the off result mode (the time from the stop until the determination of the off result) is calculated as the hit result of the special display 1 variable display game. By setting the same as the stop display time of the mode (the time from the stop to the determination of the hit result (start of fanfare)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 109 and 110, when the game control device 100 (game control means) has a power failure during the interruption of the other variable display game and the power failure is restored (power on), the power failure occurs. After the recovery (at the time of recovery or after the recovery), before execution control of one of the variable display games is started, an interruption command (interruption command) indicating that the other variable display game is being interrupted is produced. 300 (production control means) (A1022 in FIG. 9B, FIG. 93).
B1305 of A). The effect control device 300 can recognize that the other variable display game is being interrupted and the one variable display game is in a hit state (hit operation) by the interruption command, and with regard to the decoration special figure of one of the variable display games. Corresponding processing such as processing for displaying the winning symbol on the display device 41 (see the recovery screen display 1 in FIGS. 109 and 110) can be performed.

When the power failure is restored, the performance control device 300 may display a recovery screen (power failure recovery display) on the display device 41 to suggest the recovery of the power failure. When the decorative special figure variation display game displayed in the main display (first display) is interrupted, a command related to the control of the interrupted decorative special figure variation display game after the power is restored. The recovery screen may be terminated when (command) is received. The commands relating to the control of the decorative special figure variation display game include, for example, a variation command for starting the decorative special figure variation display game (see FIG. 109) and a decoration special figure stop command for stopping the decorative special figure variation display game (FIG. 110). When the command (command) related to the control of the decorative special figure variable display game on the side (reduced display side, second display side) displayed in a size different from the main display is received, the recovery screen is not terminated.

With the decorative special figure stop command, when returning to the normal screen after the end of the recovery screen, the disengagement stop pattern may be the default random pattern. In the case of a hit stop design, a default hit design according to the game value (number of rounds, etc.) of the hit state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to the probability state or the like.

There is a possibility that the command related to the control of the decorative special character variable display game on the side not on the main display (the reduced display side) may be received before the command related to the control of the decorative special character variable display game of the main display is received. However, if the recovery screen is terminated at that time, a problem may occur. For example, even if the probability is low, the player will be in a probable state (time saving state) if the recovery screen is ended and the normal screen is displayed at the start of the decorative special figure variation display game that is being reduced. There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, as shown in the recovery screen display 2 in FIGS. 109 and 110,
Even if a command relating to a new variation start of the reduced decoration display special figure variation display game (here, decoration special figure 2) is received, only the variation display is started and the recovery screen is not ended.

The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) stores the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game as start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. It is possible. Starting memory display control means (for example, segment L in FIG. 75)
The ED editing process and the main process of FIG. 90) can be notified to the player by displaying the number of start memories stored in the start storage means in a predetermined start memory display area of the display device or display. .. Then, the effect control device 300 normally displays the number of starting memories and the variable display of the variable display game restarted after the interruption in the recovery screen after the recovery on the display device 41 (when the recovery screen is not displayed). It may be displayed in a state of higher transparency. In addition, when the apparent variable display is continued even during the interruption, the variable display continued during the interruption may be displayed in a high transparency state.
In the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed on the main display may be shake fluctuation.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the same embodiment (configuration) as the first embodiment can be applied.

[Game board]
FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 3 is
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of 0a. Amusement machine 10
Is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launching device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40, which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game, is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40.

In the center case 40, an inlet 40c to a warp passage 40a for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which a game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. And are provided. Stage part 4 of the center case 40
0b is arranged above the first start winning port 36 and the normal variation winning device 33, so that the game ball rolled on the stage 40b wins the first starting winning port 36 or the regular variation winning device 33. It's getting easier. A lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. The lamp display device 80 displays the number of starting memories of each special figure variation display game and the like.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 115) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34,
The ordinary figure variable display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is achieved by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning openings 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 115).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided, and an ordinary variable winning device 33 is provided immediately below the winning opening. Is provided. The normal variation winning device 33 is provided with a movable member 33c that is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. Movable member 33c
When is closed, the game ball cannot be normally won in the variable winning device 33.

In the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning a prize in the prize hole (normal electric prize hole) of the ordinary variable prize device 33. It is configured to be stored. Therefore, the Poden winning opening (first starting winning area) is the first starting winning opening 3
It is included in the category of 6, and the ordinary entrance prize opening switch is a starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115).
Included in the category of. That is, the ordinary electric winning opening and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to a plurality of first starting winning areas, and at least a part of the first starting winning areas is in a closed state and an open state. It is configured as a normal variation winning device 33 having a movable member 33c that can be converted into.

In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls to convert the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the universal figure variation display game. It is connected to a universal electric solenoid 33b (conversion control means) for performing (see FIG. 115). The movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 is an attacker-type normal electric accessory that opens the normal electric winning opening by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side by the normal electric solenoid 33b. As the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33, by sliding the movable member 33c in the front-back direction by the universal electric solenoid 33b to advance and retreat, a so-called bello type in which a game ball can flow into the regular electric prize opening Ordinary electric accessory may be provided. Game control device 100
When the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the movable member 33c is rotated and opened via the universal electric solenoid 33b, and the game ball can flow into the regular variation winning device 33. Change to the open state.

In addition, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or A time saving state (universal support (electric power support) state) is generated by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy winning state rather than the easy winning state that occurs in the gaming state.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the center case 40, a second starting winning opening (second starting winning area) 37 for providing a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Further, a first special variable winning device (lower big winning port) 38 is provided to the left of the second starting winning port 37, and a second special variable winning device (upper) is provided above the second starting winning port 37. A special winning opening) 39 is provided.

In the second embodiment, the first special variation winning device (lower prize winning opening) 38 has a sliding to open/close door (opening/closing member) 38c, which is a tongue-shaped member, moving forwards and backwards to play the large winning opening. The ball is converted into a state in which it can flow in (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362). The first special variation winning device 38 converts the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game balls into the special winning opening, thereby allowing the player to play. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The second special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 39 is provided with a movable member 39c that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, thereby converting the game ball into a state in which it easily flows. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot be won in the special variation winning device 39.
The second special variation winning device 39 converts the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper special winning opening, thereby allowing the player to play. Is given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a predetermined special result. In the second embodiment, the special game state is a small hit (first special game state) that can occur when the small hit mode (first special result) and a big hit mode (second special result). Jackpot that can occur when
Second special game state).

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the winning of the game ball to the special electric prize winning opening (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) It is possible to control the execution of the variable display game (first variable display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a first execution control means for performing such control.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a second start winning opening (second starting winning area).
It is possible to control the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to 37. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second execution control means for performing such control.

Further, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation in which the player is more advantageous than the normal game state after the end of the big hit (second special game state) (the probability of hit is high, and , It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed with the support of normal electric power. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a specific game state generation means for performing such control.

General winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, normal variable winning device 33,
When a game ball wins the special winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38 and the special winning opening of the second special variation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 115) indicates the type of the winning opening. The prize balls of the number corresponding to are discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

A ball guiding unit 850 is provided on the upper right of the second special variation winning device 39. Ball guide 8
50 is a member that rolls the game ball flowing down on the right side of the game area 32 in the lateral direction and guides it to the second special variation winning device 39 or the like.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current game state.

[Lamp display]
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the configuration of the lamp display device 80 according to the second embodiment. The lamp display device 80 is a variable display in which a lighting display and a non-lighting display are repeated as a symbol (fourth special symbol) (
It has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) for executing (blinking), and a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of starting memory (holding number) of each special figure variable display game. The lamp display device 80
Is controlled by the performance control device 300.

The lamp display portions 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle. Batch display device 50
While the variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the universal figure display 53 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp display part 1 of the lamp display device 80, Two
The variation time of is measured by the performance control device 300.

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (decorative special figure 1 holding LED 1, decorative special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the decorative special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display portions 5 and 6 (decorative special figure 2 hold LED1, decorative special figure 2 hold LED2) indicate the decorative special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) depending on the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. indicate.

The flashing cycle of the lamp display sections 1 and 2 (fourth special symbol described later) and the flashing cycle of the lamp display section 3-6 (decoration of special decoration) are the same 200 msec (100 msec on, 100 m
Although it is set to sec off), the blinking cycle may be different so that the decorative special figure reservation and the fourth special symbol can be easily distinguished. Further, the on/off (display/non-display) time of the lamp display section 1-6 may be different.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the configuration of the collective display device 50 in the second embodiment. The collective display device 50 is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like, and is a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game. Variable display section 52
(Special figure 2 indicator) (lamp D2). In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display portion 53 (lamps D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variation display. A memory display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold display device) (lamps D11 to D14) for informing the number of stored (start) games is stored. In addition, the collective display device 50 has a general figure storage display unit 55 (general figure hold display) (lamps D15 to D16) for informing the number of starting (holding) memories of the general figure variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first state indicating a winning probability state (high probability state or low probability state).
A game state display unit 56 (first game state display unit, probability state display unit) (lamp D9), and a second game state display unit 57 (second game state) for displaying an instruction of a firing direction (left hitting or right hitting). Display) (D17). Further, the collective display device 50 is provided with a third game state display section 58 (third game state indicator) (lamps D8, D10, D18) for displaying the hit state of the universal figure variation display game.
) Has. In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a fourth gaming state display unit 59 (fourth gaming state display unit, suspended state display unit) (indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended. Lamps D19, D20).

FIG. 114 shows various display sections 53-58 which constitute the collective display device 50 in the second embodiment.
It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of (lamp D3-D20). The collective display device 50 includes various display units 5
The state of the gaming machine corresponding to the lighting mode of 3-57 is displayed. Round display 53 (lamp D
3-D7) is lit according to the number of rounds, and the memory display unit 54 (lamps D11-D14) is lit according to the number of holdings (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The general figure storage display unit (D15-D16) 55 lights up in accordance with the number of pending figures of the general figure variation display game (starting storage number). In the first gaming state display unit 56 (lamps D9 and D17), the lamp D9 is turned on in a high probability state, and the lamp D9 is turned off in a low probability state. In the second gaming state display portion 57 (lamp D17), the lamp D17 is turned on when the player hits the ball to the right and the lamp D17 is turned off when the ball is hit to the left. In the third gaming state display portion 58 (lamps D8, D10, D18), the respective lamps are turned on/off/blinking according to the lottery result of the universal figure variation display game. It is to be noted that the opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning a prize (universal prize winning a prize) of the normal variable winning a prize device 33 are different in the case of 1 per figure, 2 per figure, and 3 per figure shown in FIG. 114, respectively. You can

In the fourth gaming state display portion 59 (lamps D19 to D20), D19 lights up while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, and D20 lights up while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the interruption signal may be output as the external information.

[Game control device]
FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration example of the control system of the game control device 100 according to the second embodiment will be described, but unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, with respect to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, the gate switch 34a
Is provided. The gate switch 34 is an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121.
Connected to. The gate switch 34a detects winning of the universal figure starting gate 34. In addition, in the second embodiment, compared with the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, the universal solenoid 33b
Is provided. The universal solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

Then, as will be described later, when the universal figure random number value extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is a hit value, the game control device 100 drives the universal solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is opened by rotating (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is changed to an open state in which it easily flows into the normal variation winning device 33.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning by the winning of the prize hole of the normal variable prize device 33 (Phoden prize hole). The memory is stored. Therefore, the Poden winning entry switch is the starting opening 1 switch 36.
It shall be included in the category of a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (shift) of the game state by the above-mentioned game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 116 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 116 is a summary of each game state,
The control by the game control device 100 in each game state, the control by the effect control device 300, and the characteristics in the game state are shown. The game state in the second embodiment is
There are a normal game state, a first specific game state, a second specific game state, and a third specific game state.

First, each gaming state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100,
The probability of hit (the probability of hitting a special map) is set to a low probability, and control is performed so that there is no normal power support (power support). Further, in the normal game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. Also, in the normal game state, left-handed shooting is recommended as the firing direction. Therefore, since the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, the main variation special figure becomes the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the first specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability, and there is a universal electric power support (the number of times of support is 50 times). That is, in the first specific game state, the conversion control by the universal solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is controlled to be executed more than in the normal game state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. ..

Moreover, in the first specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probability variation mode. Further, in the first specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched rightward.
By hitting the ball to the right, it becomes easy to win the prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, and the main starting area is the winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize at the Poden prize hole, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the second specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability and the normal electric power support is absent. That is, when the above-mentioned first specific game state shifts to the second specific game state, the universal solenoid (conversion control means) 3
It can be said that the conversion control by 3b is returned to the same control as the normal game state and the probability state of the special figure is set to the high probability state (FIG. 119).

Moreover, in the second specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the small hit RU.
SH. As will be described later, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific game state, the small hit RUSH can be said to be a state in which the small hits are likely to occur continuously in a short period of time. .. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second specific game state is executed, a small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). It is possible.

Also, in the second specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be shot in the rightward direction. Therefore, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 37, and the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game.

In the third specific game state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability, and the normal electric power support is provided (the number of times of support is 50 times). Moreover, in the third specific game state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode. Also, in the third specific game state, it is recommended that the game ball be launched rightward. By hitting the ball to the right, it becomes easy to win the prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, and the main starting area is the winning opening (normal electric winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize at the Poden prize hole, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, the transition (shift) from each gaming state will be described. It is assumed that a big hit (second special game state) occurs in the normal game state. If the big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit state ends, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state. on the other hand,
When the big hit is the normal big hit in the normal game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the third specific game state.

When a normal big hit occurs in the first specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the third specific game state. In addition, when the probability variation big hit occurs in the first specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts to the first specific game state again. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, when the jackpot does not occur and the universal electric power support ends, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state (“high support regulation in FIG. 116”). The “number of times” ends. Note that “high support” means that the probability of hit is high and there is electric support).

That is, in the first specific game state, as a transition condition to another game state, a big hit (second
There is a case where the occurrence of the special game state (1) is set as a condition (first transition condition) and a case where the normal electric power support (execution of the variable display game) of a predetermined number of times is set as a condition (second transition condition). By doing so, for example, the first specific game state can be generated after the occurrence of a big hit (second special game state) in the normal game state, but in the first specific game state, the aforementioned When the second transition condition is satisfied, the second specific game state can be generated.

In the second specific game state, if the big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the first specific game state. On the other hand, when the big hit is the normal big hit in the second specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the second specific game state to the third specific game state. That is, in the second specific game state, as a condition for shifting to another game state, a big hit (second special game state) is generated.

When the probability variation big hit occurs in the third specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the first specific game state. When a normal big hit occurs in the third specific game state, after the big hit state ends, the game state shifts to the third specific game state again. On the other hand, in the third specific game state, when the big hit does not occur and the universal electric power support ends, the game state shifts from the third specific game state to the normal game state (the “low support prescribed number of times” in FIG. 116). “Low end” means that the winning probability is low and there is electric support).

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, it is possible to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation big hit occurs in the normal gaming state. In the first specific game state, the normal electric power support is executed and the winning probability is set to a high probability,
A big hit can be easily generated. And the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific game state, in the second embodiment, the game state shifts from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. In the second specific game state, although the normal electric power support is not executed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning the second start opening 37. Here, unlike the special figure 1 variable display game, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to a high probability (in FIG. 119 described later, the small hit probability is set to an extremely high probability). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to execute the "small hit RUSH" mode in which a small hit (first special game status) is frequently generated until the next big hit occurs. And jackpot (
Since it is possible to increase the number of payouts in a gaming state other than the second special gaming state), it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having a novel gaming property.

Also, in the first specific game state, there is normal power support, and in the second specific game state, there is no normal power support as in the normal game state, so a small hit (first special game state) It is possible to execute the second variable display game in which a large number of characters are allocated at a good tempo.

In addition, the special figure variation display game is executed with a high probability of a big hit in the second specific game state, so that a big hit (second special game state) occurs at an appropriate timing and another game state occurs. The transition condition of is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in payout due to excessive continuation of the second specific game state.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described. For the processing added in the second embodiment and the processing to be described again for easy understanding, the code “A*****” is used.
Numbers in the 10,000 range are added after "A".

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. 117 is obtained by adding the process of step A11311 between step A1311 and step A1312 in FIG. Therefore, steps A1301 to A1
Since the processing up to 311 and the processing from steps A1312 to A1315 are the same as those in FIG. 12, description thereof will be omitted.

In step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A11311). The details of the public figure game process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By doing so, in the second embodiment, the universal figure variation display game can be executed. Then, when the universal figure variation display game is in the winning mode, the special variation 1 variation display game is performed by opening the prize opening of the normal variation prize winning device 33 (the Poden prize opening) and winning the game ball at the Poden prize opening. Can start.

Especially, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the universal electric power support is executed (see FIG. 116). In the first specific game state, the special electric figure 1 variable display game can be frequently started by the electric power support (electric power support), and since the winning probability is high, a big hit is likely to occur. be able to. Further, even in the third specific game state, it is possible to easily cause the special figure 1 variable display game to frequently occur due to the normal electric power support.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Toku-zu 1 variation start process in the second embodiment. FIG. 118A is obtained by adding the process of step A13718 after step A3717 in FIG. Therefore, steps A3701 to A
Since the processing up to 3716 has the same contents as in FIG. 37, its explanation is omitted.

Compared with the Toku-zu 1 variation start process in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, the contents of the high-probability variation count update process (A3717) are partially different, and a new time saving variation count update process (
A13718) has been added.

The high-probability variation number update process (A3717) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state where the winning probability is high. The time saving change count update processing (A13718)
It is the process of updating the number of times the time is reduced and changing, checking the end of universal communication support, and setting the necessary information. In addition, the high-probability fluctuation number update process (A37) in the second embodiment.
17) and the details of the time saving variation number update processing (A13718), refer to FIG. 120 and FIG.
Each will be described later at 21.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the high probability variation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, so that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with a high support prescribed number.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving variation number update processing (A13
Since 718) is executed, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with the low number of times of supporting support.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process in the second embodiment. FIG. 118B is obtained by adding the process of step A13809 after step A3808 in FIG. Therefore, steps A3801 to A
Since the processing up to 3808 has the same contents as in FIG. 38, its explanation is omitted.

The high-probability variation number update process (A3808) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state where the winning probability is high. The time saving change count update process (A13809)
It is the process of updating the number of times the time is reduced and changing, checking the end of universal communication support, and setting the necessary information. Note that the high-probability fluctuation number update process (A38) in the second embodiment is performed.
08) and the processing for updating the number of time saving changes (A13809) for details, refer to FIG. 120 and FIG.
Each will be described later at 21.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the high probability variation number update process (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start process, so that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state with the high support prescribed number.

Further, in the second embodiment, the time saving variation number update processing (A13
Since 809) is executed, it is possible to shift to the normal game state with a low number of times of supporting support.

FIG. 119 is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the outfall probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. These tables show the big hit probability (probability that the judgment result will be a big hit), the small hit probability (probability that the judgment result will be a small hit), and the deviation probability (the judgment result is a deviation if the big hit judgment processing and the small hit judgment processing described above are performed. Probability) and probability change probability (probability change inrush rate)
Shows the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 119(a)
Shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 119(b) shows the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 119(c) shows the probability variation plunge rate.

Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (probability of jackpot occurrence) is
It is higher than the low probability state. The small hit probability (probability of small hit) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. It is also possible to make the small hit probability high in the high probability state and low in the low probability state. For example, in the low probability state, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game may be set to “0”. Further, the outlier probability (probability of outlier) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a big hit mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). The probability setting means is controllable into a low-probability state in which the probability of deriving is set to a low probability and a high-probability state in which a higher probability than the low-probability state is set.

Further, in the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display in the special figure 2 variable display game. It becomes higher than the game, and the outlier probability is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the off probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0.
Is). Therefore, in the second specific game state, it is possible to generate a small hit with an extremely high probability by winning the second start winning hole 37.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45, in the low probability state, the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4507), and the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game (
Long fluctuation). However, in the high probability state, since the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not set, the normal variable time variation in the special figure 2 variable display game (short variation compared to long variation) become. As a result, in the second specific game state of the high probability state, a small hit occurs more frequently in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the low probability state (small hit RUSH).

In the second embodiment, after the jackpot state ends, the probability variation state or the normal state is established. FIG. 119(c)
As shown in, the 16R probability variation inrush rate is 2% in both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation inrush rate is 60 in both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. %. That is, the probability variation rush rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit ends, the time saving of 50 rotations and the general electric power support are executed.

It should be noted that the 16R certainty variation rush rate is, for example, 2% for the special figure 1 variable display game and 40% for the particular figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R certainty variation rush rate is, for example, 60% for the special figure 1 variation display game.
The distribution of the number of big hit rounds in the probability variation state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be set to be different such that the special figure 2 variable display game is 22%. According to this structure, if the odd variation big hit is won in the small hit RUSH mode, it is possible to obtain a large number of game balls even during the big hit game, so that more small hits are generated during the small hit RUSH. In addition to improving the game motivation of the player who is trying to obtain a game ball, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation for the probability variation jackpot winning.

In addition, the occurrence of the probability jackpot RUSH mode triggers the end of the small hit RUSH mode, so the occurrence of the probability jackpot may reduce the player's willingness to play the game, but it is possible to obtain sufficient game balls even with this probability jackpot. Therefore, while maintaining the player's willingness to play, small hit RUSH again
It becomes possible to give a new game motivation to rush into.

[High probability change count update process]
Next, the high probability variation number update processing of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment (A3717 (special figure 1 fluctuation start processing), A3808 (special figure 2 fluctuation start processing))
Will be described in detail. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high-probability variation number update processing in the second embodiment. In the high-probability variation number update processing, the variation number of the special figure variation display game started in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability variation number as the remaining variation number) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101).
When it is not in the high-probability state (in the low-probability state) (result of A15101 is “N”), the high-probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

When in the high probability state (result of A15101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability variation number indicating the remaining number of the special figure variation display game started in the high probability state by -1 (1 (A15102). The initial value of the number of high-probability fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (to be described later in special figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 big hit end processing. ). In addition, special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2
Even if any of the variable display games starts to change, the high-probability change number is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (A15).
103). When the number of high-probability fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15103 is “N”), that is,
If the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100
Ends the high-probability change count update process. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103
Result of “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding high probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15104).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15105), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start changing. The high-probability & short-time-less final fluctuation flag is set (A15106), and the high-probability fluctuation count update process is terminated. The high probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag will be described later.

In this way, by performing the high-probability fluctuation number update processing in the second embodiment,
From the state of the specific game state (high probability, with electric support) to the second specific game state (high probability,
It is possible to shift to a state of no electric support (especially A15105).

[Processing for updating the number of time saving changes]
Next, the details of the time saving variation number update processing (A13718 (Tokugatsu 1 variation start processing)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the time saving variation number update processing in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a short period of time (state with low probability & electric support) (A15201). When it is not during the time saving (the result of A15201 is “N”), the time saving variation number updating process is ended.

The game control device 100 is in a short time (low probability & state with electric support) (A1520).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and the number of time saving fluctuations is updated by -1 (by subtracting 1) (A15202).
.. The initial value of the number of time saving fluctuations is the number of times the time saving mode is maintained after the big hit ends, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit ending process or special figure 2 in a second embodiment described later). Jackpot end processing). In addition, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts fluctuating, the number of time-saving fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (A152).
03). When the number of time saving fluctuations is not 0 (result of A15203 is “N”), that is, when the time saving mode continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100,
The processing for updating the number of time saving changes is ended. When the number of time saving fluctuations is 0 (result of A15203 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding low probability & no time saving in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15204).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15205), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start changing. The low-probability & no time saving final variation flag is set (A15206), and the time saving variation number updating process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time saving number of times updating process in the second embodiment, the normal game state (low probability, no power support is appropriately performed) from the state of the third specific game state (low probability, power support is provided). ) State (in particular, A15205).

As described above, in the second embodiment, a part of the high-probability variation number processing in the first embodiment is changed, and the time saving variation number updating processing is added. Therefore, as a flag corresponding to the high-probability final fluctuation flag in the first embodiment, a high-probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag (A
15106) and a low probability & no time saving final variation flag (A15206).

In order to cope with such changes, in the second embodiment, steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A5728, A5745, A5828, A58 in the first embodiment.
48. “High probability final change?” is read as “final change?”. The “final fluctuation” is a final fluctuation that ends the low probability and time saving state, and when the low probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the final fluctuation in the low probability and time saving state has ended. When the high-probability & short-time-less final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability and short-time final fluctuation has ended.

In addition, in the second embodiment, steps A2712 and A3514 in the first embodiment.
, A3607, A5737, and A5837, "high probability medium?" should be read as "high probability or time saving medium?"

Further, in the second embodiment, the “clear high probability variation frequency region” of step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as “clear high probability variation frequency region and time reduction variation frequency region”. Further, in the second embodiment, step A590 in the first embodiment.
The "clear high probability final variation flag area" of 9 is read as "clear final variation flag area".

It should be noted that the “final change flag area” is a high-probability & high-probability & non-time-saving final fluctuation flag area that stores a final fluctuation flag and a low-probability & low-probability & non-time-saving final fluctuation flag area.
Includes final fluctuation flag area without time saving.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 123 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (A16701), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A1670).
2). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (off data of one big hit signal, off data of three big hits) in the external information output data area (A1670).
3).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability variation determination data includes high-probability data (high probability, with power support) and low-probability data (low probability, with power support). When the probability variation determination data is not the low probability data (low probability, with power support) (“N” in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start with high probability and time saving in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, there is power support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A16720 and thereafter. The processing after step A16720 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16706, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control device 100
Saves the signal related to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A1
6708). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A16709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a number with a high probability in the game state display number area (
A16710), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A1671).
1), the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16712). Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A16713).
), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring agency flag area (A1671).
4) The special figure status area is cleared (A16715).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). As a result, in the first specific game state, it is possible to increase the probability of hitting and to execute normal electric power support. Then, in the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Next, while saving the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation count area for holding the high-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the short-time fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (A16718), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (A16719), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

In step A16705 described above, the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability,
If there is power support (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100
Saves the low probability & start time signal in the external information output data area (A1
6720).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16722). After that, the signal related to the right-handing instruction (launching position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A1).
6723).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (
A16724), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A1672).
5), the number of light-out is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16726). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16727).
), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud start period flag area (A1672)
8) The special figure status area is cleared (A16729).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). Thereby, in the third specific game state, it is possible to execute the ordinary electric power support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated. Next, while saving the initial value of the low-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the low-probability fluctuation count, the time-shortening fluctuation count in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the performance control device 300 upon power recovery (A16732).
, The special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A16733).
), the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

By doing this, after the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with power support)),
It is possible to set the hit probability to a high probability, and with the existence of the universal electric power support, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support) after the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the hit probability is set to low probability and there is support for Dentsu. As a result, it is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 124 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 125 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

The game control device 100 first sets “0” as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A16801), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A1680).
2). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit (off data of one big hit signal, off data of three big hits) in the external information output data area (A1680).
3).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability variation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability variation determination data includes high-probability data (high probability, with power support) and low-probability data (low probability, with power support). When the probability variation determination data is not the low probability data (low probability, with power support) (“N” in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start with high probability and time saving in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability variation determination data is low-probability data (low probability, electric power is supported) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A16820 and subsequent steps. The processing after step A16820 will be described later.

After the processing of step A16806, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control device 100
Saves the signal related to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A1
6808). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (launching position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A16809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a number with a high probability in the game state display number area (
A16810), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A1681).
1), the off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16812). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area for upper prize winning (A16813).
), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring organization flag area of the lower winning a prize mouth (A1681)
4) The special figure status area is cleared (A16815).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16816). As a result, in the first specific game state, it is possible to increase the probability of hitting and to execute normal electric power support. Then, in the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Next, while saving the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the high-probability fluctuation count area for holding the high-probability fluctuation count, the short-time fluctuation count is stored in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the short-time fluctuation count. The initial value of (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is ended.

In step A16805 described above, the probability variation determination data is low probability data (low probability,
If there is power support (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100
Saves the low probability & start time signal in the external information output data area (A1
6820).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16822). After that, the signal related to the right-handing instruction (launching position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A1).
6823).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (
A16824), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A1682).
5), the number of lights off is saved in the round LED pointer area (A16826). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (A16827).
), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud start period flag area (A1682).
8) The special figure status area is cleared (A16829).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). Thereby, in the third specific game state, it is possible to execute the ordinary electric power support and the time saving mode. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated. Next, while saving the initial value of the low-probability fluctuation count (for example, 50 times) in the low-probability fluctuation count area for holding the low-probability fluctuation count, the time-shortening fluctuation count in the time-short fluctuation count area for holding the time-short fluctuation count. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the performance control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16832).
, The special figure 2 big hit end processing ends.

By doing this, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with power support)),
It is possible to set the hit probability to a high probability, and with the existence of the universal electric power support, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state. Also, after the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support), the hit probability is set to low probability and there is support for Poden. , It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special drawing 1 small hit end processing]
Next, special figure 1 small hit end processing in special figure 1 game processing of 2nd execution form (A3218)
Will be described in detail. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 126 shows steps A7207 and A7 in FIG.
The processing of step A17207 is added to the processing 208. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to A7210 have the same contents as in FIG.

In Step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in time saving (A17207). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortening (A1
If the result of 7207 is “N”), the processes of step A7208 and subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, if the time is shortening (result of A17207 is “Y”), the processes of step A7210 and subsequent steps are executed.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, special figure 2 small hit end processing in special figure 2 game processing of 2nd execution form (A3321)
Will be described in detail. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 127 shows steps A7308 and A7 in FIG.
309, and the processing of step A17308 is added. Therefore, the processing from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to A7310 have the same contents as in FIG.

In Step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortening (A17308). When the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortening (A1
If the result of 7308 is “N”), the processes from step A7309 are executed. On the other hand, if it is during the time saving (the result of A17308 is “Y”), the special figure 2 small hit end process is ended.

By doing so, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end process (modified example of the second embodiment)]
A modification of the above-described Toku-zu 1 big hit ending process (A3214) in the Toku-zu 1 game process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a first flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 129 is a second flowchart showing a modification of the special figure 1 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

128 and 129 show steps A19719 in the processing in FIGS.
To A19723 and steps A19733 to A19737 are added. Therefore, steps A16701 to A16718 and step A1
The processing from 6720 to step A16732 has the same contents as in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, so description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special display 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19719 is "N"), clear the special Fig. 2 game interruption flag area where the special illustration 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19722), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (result of A19719 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19720), and execute effect command setting processing (A
19721). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the above-mentioned steps A19722, A19
The processing of 723 is executed, and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

In step A19733, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (A19733). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19703 is "N"), clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM (A19736), The 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (result of A19733 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19734), and execute effect command setting processing (A
19735). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Then, the above-mentioned steps A19736, A19
The processing of 737 is executed, and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

128 and 129 show the second modification of the special figure 1 big hit end process in the first embodiment.
It can be said that it is modified so as to be applicable to the embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the toku-zu 1 big hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects in the second embodiment are provided. That is, after the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)), the winning probability is set to a high probability. At the same time, it is possible to shift to the first specific game state with the presence of the ordinary electric support. In addition, when the probability variation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is electric support) after the special figure 1 big hit is finished, the hit probability is set to low probability and the ordinary electric power support is set. , It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing (modified example of the second embodiment)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the aforementioned special figure 2 game process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a first flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment. In addition, FIG. 131 is a second flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the second embodiment.

130 and 131 show steps A19819 in the processing in FIGS.
To A19722, and steps A19833 to A19836 are added. Therefore, steps A16801 to A16818 and step A1
Since the processing from 6820 to step A16832 is the same as that in FIGS. 124 and 125, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19819, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the Toku-zu 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of A19819 is "N"), the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag area in which the Toku-zu 1 game-interrupt flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19822), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (the result of A19819 is "Y"), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing to restart the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19820), and execute effect command setting processing (A
19821). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for resuming decoration special figure 1 can execute the process for resuming the variable display game for decoration special figure 1. After that, the above-mentioned processing of step A19822 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

In Step A19833, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not being interrupted (result of A19833 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set in the RWM is cleared (A19836), 2 The big hit ending process ends.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A19833 is “Y”), the game control device 100 directs a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19834), and execute effect command setting processing (A
19835). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for resuming decoration special figure 1 can execute the process for resuming the variable display game for decoration special figure 1. After that, the above-mentioned processing of step A19836 is executed, and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

130 and 131 show a second modification of the special figure 2 big hit end process in the first embodiment.
It can be said that it is modified so as to be applicable to the embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the special figure 2 big hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects in the second embodiment are provided. That is, when the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with universal communication support)) after the end of the special figure 2 big hit,
It is possible to shift to the first specific game state with a high probability of hitting and the presence of the universal electric power support. In addition, after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, there is Hoden support), the hit probability is low probability, and Hoden support is provided, It is possible to shift to the third specific game state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, special figure 1 small hit end processing in special figure 1 game processing of 2nd execution form (A3218)
A modified example will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of a procedure of special figure 1 small hitting end processing according to the modification. FIG. 132 shows steps A7207 and A in FIG.
7208 with the processing of step A17207 added. Therefore, the processing from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processing from steps A7208 to S8814 have the same contents as in FIG.

In Step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortening (A17207). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortening (A
The result of 17207 is "N"), and the processes of step A7208 and thereafter are executed. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving period (the result of A17207 is “Y”), the game control device 100, step S881.
The processing after 0 is executed.

It can be said that FIG. 132 is a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit ending process in the first embodiment, the following effects are exhibited. That is, according to the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification)]
Next, special figure 2 small hit end processing in special figure 2 game processing of 2nd execution form (A3321)
A modified example will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 small hitting end processing according to the modification. FIG. 133 shows steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG.
And the processing of step A17308 is added between. Therefore, step A73
Since the processing from 01 to A7308 and the processing from steps A7309 to S8914 are the same as those in FIG. 89, description thereof will be omitted.

In Step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during time saving (A17308). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that the time is not shortening (A
If the result of 17308 is “N”), the processes of step A7309 and subsequent steps are executed. On the other hand, when it is in the time saving period (the result of A17308 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A891.
The processing after 1 is executed.

It can be said that FIG. 133 is a modification of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effects of the modified example of the special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the first embodiment, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the above process, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not short, it is possible to shift to the normal game state in which the shooting direction is left-handed.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A11310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). For details on the gate switch monitoring process,
It will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the ordinary electric prize opening switch which detects the award (ball) to the award opening (normal electric prize opening) of the normal variation winning device 33. Is executed (A17602). In the second embodiment, unlike the prior art, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored according to the winning of the Poden prize hole. Therefore, the ordinary electric prize opening is included in the category of the first starting winning opening 36, and the ordinary electric prize switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a. The details of the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1
(A17603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A17604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is “Y”), that is, when the game control device 100 has timed up or has already timed up,
The universal figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number is set in the register (A17605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A17606).
Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A17607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A17607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the general figure fluctuation display game, sets effect, and so on. The ordinary figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the ordinary figure change process is executed (A17608). The details of the ordinary figure ordinary process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

Further, when the game process number is “1” in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A17609). Details of the processing for changing the universal figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

If the game process number is “2” in step A17607 and the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. Processing for displaying a general figure, such as setting of the opening time and setting of information necessary for performing the processing for hitting a general figure, is executed (A17610). Details of the processing for displaying a general figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “3” in step A17607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the normal hitting process or performing the normal electric remaining ball process. The middle hit process is executed (A17611). For more information about the processing
It will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the universal figure ending process (A17612). ). Details of the processing for remaining balls in the universal figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A17608). (A17613). Details of the per-universal-drawing end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A17614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 (A1760).
4 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, step A1761
The processing after 4 is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A17601 in the universal figure game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A17701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A17701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A17702). Here, the gaming state to hit right is a big hit state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state. If it is in the game state of hitting to the right (result of A17702 is “Y”), the process moves to step A17705. When the game state is not right hitting (the result of A17702 is "N"), a left hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A17704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handing instruction notification command notifies the left-handed instruction (warning).
Is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved universal figures and determines whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A17705). When the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (the result of A17705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved universal figures by +1 (A17706), and corresponds to the number of reserved universal figures after the update. Then, the address of the random number storage area is calculated (A17707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A17708), the hit symbol random number is extracted, and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A177).
09), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (A17701)
Result is “N”), or when it is determined that the number of reserved universal maps is not less than the upper limit value (A17).
When the result of 705 is “N”), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (A17602) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process. In addition, as described above, the ordinary prize winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 115).

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the universal figure is hit, that is, whether or not the universal figure variation display game is in the hit state and the normal variation prize winning device 33 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A17801). Then, when the normal drawing is in progress (the result of A17801 is "Y
)), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the Poden winning a prize mouth switch (A17802). When there is an input to the ordinary electric prize opening switch (result of A17802 is "Y"), the count number of the ordinary electric power counter is updated by +1 (A17803).

Next, in the game control device 100, the count number of the updated universal electric counter is an upper limit value (for example,
It is determined whether or not 6) has been reached (A17804). When the count number reaches the upper limit value (result of A17804 is “Y”), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the end point pointer area in the RWM in the universal map, and the hit end pointer value is stored in the RWM. Is saved in the middle control pointer area (A17805).

Finally, the universal figure game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is ended. In other words, if there is a prize winning over the upper limit in the hit state of the universal figure,
At that time, the value of the end of hit is saved in the processing control pointer area during the hitting of the figure, and the normal variation winning device 33 is closed so that the hitting state of the figure ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the middle of hitting a normal figure (result of A17801 is “N”), it is determined that there is no input to the ordinary electric prize opening switch (result of A17802 is “N”). ), or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (A178
When the result of 04 is "N"), the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A17608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the steps of the ordinary figure ordinary processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of universal figure reservations is 0 (A17901).
). If the number of reserved figures is not 0 (the result of A17901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per ordinary figure of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of RWM of the figure is stored. Loads a random number per design from (for hold number 1), clears the random number per universal figure storage area (for hold number 1) and the random number per universal figure storage area (for hold number 1) to 0 (A17902) ).
Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in the high probability of being in a regular figure (during a high probability state), that is, whether it is a time-saving state (a state of the universal power support state) It is determined (A17903). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

The game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal figure low probability when the normal figure high probability is not (the result of A17903 is “N”) (A179).
04), if it is in the high probability of universal figure (the result of A17903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) which is the lower limit determination value in the high probability of universal figure is set (A17905), and the step A1
The processing moves to 7906.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A17906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (result of A17906 is “Y”), that is, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step A17908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A17906 is "N"), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A17907).

If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A17907 is "Y"), that is, if the hit random number, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A1790).
8). In addition, as the universal figure stop symbol number, the deviation stop symbol number is set (A17909),
Save the missing symbol information in the universal symbol stop symbol information area (A17910), and step A179.
Then, the processing shifts to 14.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A17907 is “N”), that is, if it is a hit, the game control device 100 saves hit information in the hit flag area (A17911),
The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A17912), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A1791).
3) and proceeds to the process of step A17914. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in the present embodiment, there are three (1 per ordinary figure, 2 per ordinary figure, 3 per ordinary figure).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (A179).
14), save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A17915), shift the random number storage area per universal figure (A17916), and clear the empty area after the shift to 0 (A1)
7917), and the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (A17918).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one.
By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the universal figure game processing timer area (A
17920). For example, the fluctuating time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and 40/
It is distributed to 1500 msec at 256 and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the processing for setting shift to normal figure processing transition setting processing is executed (A17921), and the normal figure normal processing ends. It should be noted that the general-university-during-process transition setting process will be described later.

Further, when the universal figure holding number is 0 (result of A17901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets “0” as a process number for shifting to the regular figure normal process (A17922).
), the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A17923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the ordinary processing routine processing is ended.

[Usually changing the processing during the transition process]
FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during universal figure change. The universal figure changing process transition setting processing is the step A17921 in the universal figure normal processing shown in FIG. 137.
It is executed in.

The game control device 100 first sets "1" as the process number for shifting to the process during universal figure fluctuation.
Is set (A18101), and the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A181).
02).

Then, the game control device 100, the signal related to the start of the universal figure variation display game (normal symbol 1
The changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A18103), and the changing flag indicating that the figure variation display game is changing is saved in the figure variation control flag area (A18104). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking period timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area (A18105).
), the initial value (0 in this case) is saved in the universal pattern variation symbol number area (A18106). After that, the processing for setting transition during routine change ends.

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, the details of the processing for changing the figure-to-body (A17609) in the figure-to-body game process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process of changing the universal figure.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying general figure (A18301), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (A18302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the universal figure display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) which is the display time of the result of the universal figure variation display game on the universal figure display in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18303). ..

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of variation of the universal figure (normal symbol 1 varying signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the universal figure variation control flag area (A
18305), and ends the process of changing the universal map.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, the details of the normal figure displaying process (A17610) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process of displaying a general figure.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or deviance information) set in the normal figure normal process (A18401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A1).
8402). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A18403).

If the hit information is set in the hit flag, the game control device 100 (A1840).
The result of 3 is "Y"), the hitting process setting table is set (A18404), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the figure stop symbol information (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per figure) ) Is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (A18405). Also, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per universal figure)
Is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per universal figure (A18406). Then, the universal communication opening time (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per universal figure) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18407). By the above process, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 33 is set during the probability change state or the time saving state (during the normal power support state), and the opening can be performed, for example, three times or twice.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays "3" as the process number for shifting to the process of hitting a normal figure.
Is set (A18408), and the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A18).
409). After that, the signal regarding the hit of the general figure fluctuation display game (ordinary symbol 1 hitting medium signal is turned on) and the signal regarding the start of normal electric actuation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A18410). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid 33b, the on data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (
A18411).

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information of the ordinary electric charge count area in which the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 33 is stored (A18412), and determines the number of prizes to the ordinary variable prize device 33 in the ordinary electric charge fraud monitoring period. Clear the information on the memorized Poden fraud prize area (A18413)
.. Finally, the flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning a prize device 33 is saved in the normal communication fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

The game control device 100, if the hit information is not set in the hit flag (A184
The result of 03 is "N"), and "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal/normal process (
A18415), the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A18416). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (A18417).
, The process of displaying the general map ends.

[Usually hit processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (A17611) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process of hitting a normal figure.

First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares a control pointer for a normal figure (A186).
01), it is judged whether or not the value of the loaded general-purpose hit-to-actual control pointer reaches the value of the hit-to-universal-actuation-during-university-control pointer upper limit value area (a hit end value) (A18602).

Then, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hit does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the universal figure hit (the result of A18602 is "N"), the control during the universal figure hit The pointer is updated by +1 (A18603). Further, the ordinary electric power operation shift setting process is executed (A18604), and the ordinary figure hitting mid-time process ends. The details of the normal power operation shift setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the universal figure hits the value in the upper limit area of the control pointer during the universal figure (the value of the end of hit), the game control device 100 (the result of A18602 is “Y”), In step A18603, the ordinary-university-game process control pointer area is not updated (+1), but the ordinary-electrical-operation shift setting process is executed (A18604).

[Uden operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation shift setting process (A18604) in the normal figure hitting process will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation shift setting process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 33, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A187).
01). Note that here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step A18603. If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, step A1870
In order to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 33 by shifting to the processing of 2, the wait time (for example, 300 msec) after the closing of the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area. (A18702).

Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn off the normal power solenoid 33b (A1873), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A18704 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 33,
Hoden opening time (for example, opening time of the normal variation winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer)
1700 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18704). Further, ON data is set in the universal electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 33b (A18705), and the ordinary electric power operation shift setting processing is ended.

If the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100, step A1
In order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 33 by shifting to the process of 8706, the normal electric opening time (eg, 2600 mse) which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer.
c) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18706). Further, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 33b, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A1
8707), and ends the normal power operation shift setting process.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the game control device 100
Sets "4" as the process number in order to move to step A18708 and end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 33 and execute the ordinary electric ball remaining process (A17612) (A187).
08), the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A18709).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the general figure game processing timer area (A18710). Then, the OFF data is saved in the POD solenoid output data area to set the POD solenoid 33b to OFF (A187).
11) Then, the normal power operation shift setting process ends.

[Universal residual ball treatment]
Next, details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (A17612) in the normal figure game process will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric ball remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "5" related to the end process per universal figure (A1).
8901), the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (A18902). After that, the universal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (A18903).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the operation end of the normal variation winning device 33 (normal electric auditors product 1 operating signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A18904).
.. Then, clear the Poden count number area for counting the number of prizes awarded to the normal variable winning device 33 (
(A18905), and further, clears the middle control pointer area for normal drawing (A18906).
After that, the per-universal-diagram end pointer area is cleared (A18907), and the ordinary electric power remaining ball processing ends.

[End processing per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the per-universal-drawing ending process (A17613) in the general-university-drawing game process will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the end processing per universal figure.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number “0” related to the normal/universal process (A191).
01), and further saves the processing number in the universal figure game processing number area (A19102). After that, the signal regarding the hit end of the universal figure fluctuation game (normal symbol 1 hitting signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (flag during fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 33 in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104).
After that, the per-universal figure end processing is ended.

[Operation and effect of the second embodiment]
Hereinafter, the operation and effect of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. In FIG. 145, in order to explain the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the second specific game state, the execution state and the stopped state of the special figure 2 variable display game (described as “special figure 2 game”), The execution state of the small hitting operation, the opening/closing state of the lower big winning opening (the winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38), and the state of the game ball near the opening/closing door of the lower large winning opening are shown.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment changes the sliding type opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c of the first special winning device 38 from the closed state to the open state when a small hit (first special game state) is generated. Convert. The first special winning device 38 has a configuration in which the game balls are retained on the open/close door (open/close member) 38c when the open/close door (open/close member) 38c is in the closed state. Further, when the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c is in the open state, the game balls accumulated on the opening/closing door (opening/closing member) 38c can be won. This allows the door (opening/closing member) to open and close even when the open state is short.
A large number of game balls can be won by the game balls retained in 38c entering the first special winning device 38, and the number of balls can be efficiently increased in the second specific game state. Has become.

In the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit RUS in the second specific game state.
When H occurs, the variation starts each time the second start winning port 37 is won. FIG. 119 above.
As shown in, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set to be extremely high in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and in the second specific game state, the special figure 2 variable display game Fluctuations are set to short fluctuations. Therefore, the small hit operation occurs one after another.

When a small hit occurs, the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times (e.g., eight times) for each small hit. During the small hitting operation (first special game state), the open state time of the lower special winning opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is set shorter than the closed state time. For example, the closing time of the special winning opening may be 1.2 seconds, while the opening time may be 0.2 seconds.

The special variation winning device unit that constitutes the first special variation winning device 38 has a configuration in which the downward force of the game balls on the opening/closing door 38c is weakened (see, for example, JP-A-2017-77362).
As a result, the game balls are likely to stay on the opening/closing door 38c.

In such a structure, when a small hit RUSH occurs in which a small hit occurs frequently, the closed state of the lower special winning opening is set to be longer than the open state. The game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c. After that, since the opening/closing door 38c is opened, many game balls staying on the opening/closing door 38c will win the lower special winning opening at once. As a result, when the small hit RUSH occurs, a lot of prize balls can be given to the player.

By doing so, in the probability variation loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, the small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after exiting the first specific gaming state. , A new game property can be realized in which the more balls fit, the more game balls can be acquired.

In addition, when explaining with reference to FIG. 145, a small hit occurs in a predetermined variable display game,
When a small hit occurs in the next variable display game of this predetermined variable display game, a period for ensuring the flow down and retention state of the game balls is secured by the variation period of the identification information in the next variable display game. be able to. Accordingly, when the small hitting operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening/closing door 38c by utilizing the variable time of the subsequent game. Then, a large number of game balls retained on the opening/closing door 38c can be swiftly awarded to the lower special winning opening to give a large number of prize balls to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific game state after the end of the big hit (second special game state), the small hit mode ( Since it is shifted to the second specific game state in which the first special result) can be derived, it is possible to perform a novel game state transition that has never been seen before. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, it is possible to efficiently change the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) in which many small hits are allocated.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the same configuration as that of the second embodiment can be applied. Note that the configurations not described in the second embodiment and the third embodiment can be applied to the configurations common to the first embodiment.

The third embodiment relates to a small hit production that notifies the occurrence of a small hit state. In particular, the small hit production includes a blessing presentation in which the occurrence of the small hit is celebrated and notified. It should be noted that the blessing effect does not include the display of the stop pattern for the small hit (the stop display for the small hit) itself.

In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit result (small hit mode, first special result, first hit result), a small hit state (first special game state) occurs. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit result (big hit mode, second special result, second hit result), a game value (outgoing balls, number of balls acquired) that is more advantageous to the player than a small hit state is given. Big hit state that can be given (second
Special game state) occurs.

In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is longer in the big hit state than in the small hit state, so in the big hit state (second special game state), the game is smaller than in the small hit state (first special game state). The player has a lot of game value (ball payout, number of balls to be acquired), and it is possible to give the player a game value more advantageous than the small hit state. In addition, in both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is in an open state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the small hit state is called a first special game state, and the big hit state is called a second special game state. ..

In addition, in the small hit, a normal small hit (normal small hit) in which the small hit result of the main variable display game is generated, and an irregular small hit in which the small hit state is generated by the small hit result of the subsidiary variable display game There is a hit. Further, the big hit includes a normal big hit in which a big hit state is generated according to the big hit result of the main variable display game, and an irregular big hit in which a big hit state is generated according to the big hit result of the subsidiary variable display game.

Here, the main variation display game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area (main area, main starting winning opening) where the game ball often enters, and the subsidiary variation display game is It is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-starting region (sub-region, sub-starting winning opening) in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the starting region. Similar to the first and second embodiments, the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can be in a running state (simultaneously) (simultaneous variation is possible).

As described with reference to FIG. 116, in the normal game state (first game state), the first start winning opening 36 (first starting area) becomes the main starting area where the game balls often enter, and the second starting prize. The mouth 37 (second starting area) is a sub starting area in which game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Then, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game, and the subsidiary variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 116, in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state, second game state), the second start winning hole 37 (second start area) may enter the game ball. There are many main starting areas, and the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting area) is a sub starting area in which game balls are less likely to enter than the main starting area. Then, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the sub variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game. The small hit RUSH state (second specific game state) has a high probability of hitting, and is a state in which there is no universal electric power support.

In the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is long-term variation (long variation, for example, 10 minutes), and it is recommended to enter the game ball into the first start winning opening 36. And
Left hitting, which facilitates entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 36, is more advantageous and recommended for the player than right hitting. In the normal game state, the display device 41 can display a left-handed display for recommending left-handing to the player (a display that recommends entering a game ball into the first starting winning opening 36). In addition, the left-handed striking the game ball toward the left side of the game area 32 (first game area) is called the first launch mode of the ball launching device (launching means), and the right side of the game area 32 (second game area). The right-handed striking is called the second launch mode of the ball launching device.

In the small hit RUSH state (small hit rush state), a small hit can be generated with an extremely high probability by winning the second start winning opening 37, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 37. Recommended. Then, right-handing (second firing mode), which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 37, is more advantageous and recommended for the player than left-handing (first firing mode). In the small hit RUSH state, the display device 41 can display a right hit display for recommending a right hit to the player (a display recommending entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 37).

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 116, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, since the game control device 100 has the universal power support, the winning opening of the normal variation winning device 33 (normal power prize). Mouth) is the main starting area where the game balls often enter, and the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 is the sub starting area where the game balls enter less than the main starting area. Become. Also, right-handed is more advantageous and recommended for the player than left-handed.

In the first specific game state and the third specific game state, the main variation display game is a special figure 1 variation display game that is executed based on a ball entering the Poden prize hole (main starting area) The display game is a special figure 1 variable display game executed on the basis of a ball entering the first starting winning opening 36 (secondary starting area), or a second starting winning opening 37 (secondary starting area) The special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on In addition, the game control device 100 is information for determining whether the game is the special figure 1 variable display game executed based on which of the first start winning opening 36 and the ordinary electric winning opening. Includes information on whether the game ball was detected with the start opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 or the Hoden winning opening switch) in the variation command (variation type command) or decoration special figure 1 command (design type command), It may be transmitted to the performance control device 300.

In summary, in the normal game state (first game state), it is recommended that the game balls be inserted into the first start winning opening 36 (first starting area), and the first starting winning opening 36 becomes the main starting area. ,
The second starting winning opening 37 (second starting area) becomes a sub starting area. In the small hit RUSH state (second game state), it is recommended that the game balls enter the second start winning opening 37, and the second starting winning opening 3
7 is the main starting area, and the first starting winning opening 36 is the sub starting area. In addition, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state, it is recommended that a game ball enter the Poden winning opening of the normal variation winning device 33, and the Poden winning opening becomes the main starting area, The first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 serves as a sub starting area.

The effect control device 300, the information of the hit command received most recently, the information of the symbol command received most recently (B1801 special symbol type, B1802 symbol type), high support prescribed number of times (for example, 50 times), From the low support defined number of times (for example, 50 times), the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the big hit, the probability information (B1313), etc., the current game state is the normal game state,
It is possible to determine which of the small hit RUSH state, the first specific game state, and the third specific game state. The current game state can be determined also from the production mode (B1318) such as the normal mode, the probability variation mode, the time saving mode, and the small hit RUSH mode in FIG.

Then, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 continuously displays the left hitting display 656 (described later) on the display device 41 while the current game state is the normal game state, and the current game state is a small hit. While the state, the big hit state, the first specific game state, the small hit RUSH state (the second specific game state), and the third specific game state, the right hit display 658 (described later) is continuously displayed on the display device 4.
Display in 1.

[Winning command processing]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing according to the third embodiment. The production control device 300 executes the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 92).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). The hit command is the fanfare command (A
5714, A5814) or small hit fanfare command (A5735, A5835)
If, then the MODE part represents a fanfare. It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for a big hit. The upper limit value of the number of rounds can be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE part of the hit system command represents fanfare, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 2101 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit, that is, whether or not the hit system command is the small hit fanfare command received due to the occurrence of the irregular small hit. The determination is made (B2102).

Production control device 300, when the hit system command is not due to irregular small hit (
When the result of B2102 is "N"), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect is executed (B2103). The fanfare effect is a small hit fanfare effect when a small hit fanfare command is received, or a big hit fanfare effect when a fanfare command is received. Subsequently, the fanfare is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P machine state) (B2104),
The hit command processing ends.

In addition, as described above, the irregular small hit is a case where the result of the special figure variation display game started based on the winning of the game ball in the sub starting area (sub area) is a small hit. A small hit. Further, the effect control device 300, for example, a small figure variation display game of a special figure type (for example, special figure 2) different from the main variation display game (for example, special figure 1 variable display game) corresponding to the current game state is a small hit. If it becomes, it can be determined as an irregular small hit.

On the other hand, if the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 does not set the fanfare effect, and the small hit fanfare effect is not executed, and step B2104 is performed. The process of is executed.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round ( B2105). The hit command is a round command (A6102
) Or a small hit open command (A6902, A6909, A6916, A6923), the MODE part indicates a round.

Production control device 300, when the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2105 is “Y”)
), it is determined whether or not the hit system command is due to irregular small hit, that is, whether or not the hit system command is a small hit opening command received due to occurrence of irregular small hit (B2106). When the hit system command is not due to irregular small hit (B
If the result of 2106 is “N”), the round effect setting process for setting the round effect is executed (
B2107). The round effect is a small hit medium effect during a big winning opening by a small hit when a small hit opening command is received, or a big hit round effect during a big hit round when a round command is received. .. Then, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P
During the round is set to the game state flag indicating the machine state (B2108), and the hit system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 does not set the round effect and does not execute the small hit mid effect, and the step B2108 is performed. The process of is executed.

If the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the round (the result of B2105 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines that the MOD of the hit system command is received.
It is determined whether the E section represents an interval (B2109). When the hit command is an interval command, the MODE part indicates the interval. In the present embodiment, in the small hit, the special winning opening is opened only once (see FIG. 69), that is,
There is no interval command because the small hit is one round. However, even in the case of a small hit, the interval command is present in a configuration in which the special winning opening is opened and closed a plurality of times.

Production control device 300, when the MODE section represents an interval (the result of B2109 is "
Y"), it is determined whether or not the hit system command is due to an irregular small hit, that is, whether or not the hit system command is a command received due to occurrence of the irregular small hit.
B2110). When the hit system command is not due to irregular small hit (B2110
Result is "N"), the interval effect setting process for setting the interval effect of the big hit (or the small hit) is executed, and the interval is set in the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10. Setting is made (B2111, B2112), and the hit command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the interval (result of B2109 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command indicates the ending ( B2113). The hit command is the ending command (A6
307) or a small hit end screen command (A7001), the MODE part indicates the ending.

When the MODE part of the hit command indicates the ending (B2)
The result of 113 is "Y") and whether or not the hit system command is due to the irregular small hit, that is, whether or not the hit system command is the small hit end screen command received due to the occurrence of the irregular small hit. Is determined (B2114). When the hit system command is not due to the irregular small hit (the result of B2114 is "N"), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect is executed (B2115). The ending effect is a small hit ending effect at the end of the small hit (display effect of the small hit end screen) when the small hit end screen command is received, and a big hit ending at the end of the big hit when the ending command is received. It becomes an effect (display effect of the big hit end screen). The ending state is set to the game state flag indicating the current game state of the game machine 10 (P machine state) (B2116), and the hit system command processing is ended.

Production control device 300, if the hit system command is due to irregular small hit (
The result of B2114 is "Y"), the small hit ending effect is not set, and the process of step B2116 is executed so that the small hit end screen display effect is not executed.

If the MODE part of the received hit system command does not indicate the ending (result of B2113 is “N”), production control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process.

The above-mentioned small hit fanfare effect, small hit medium effect, small hit interval effect, and small hit ending effect are collectively referred to as a small hit effect. The small hit production is an effect executed due to the small hit. In addition, the above big hit fanfare, big hit round,
Big hit interval production and big hit ending production are collectively called big hit production.

FIG. 147A is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by such hit command processing with respect to a normal game state (left hit state). FIG. 147B shows the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by the hit system command processing, a small hit RUSH state (right hitting state)
FIG.

In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is the sub variable display game. In the small hit RUSH state, the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the main variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the sub variable display game.

147A and 147B, in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, when the result of the main variation display game is the small hit result, in the second period after the first period, the small hit effect (small A winning fanfare effect, a small hit medium effect, a small hit ending effect, etc.) are executed. On the other hand, when the sub variable display game result is the small hit result in the first period, the small hit effect is not executed in the second period after the first period. In addition, here, in the second period,
This is the duration of the small hit state.

Then, only when the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result (in the case of a normal small hit), as a part of the small hit effect, a blessing effect that celebrates and notifies the occurrence of the small hit state is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the sub variable display game is a small hit result (in the case of an irregular small hit)
Since the small hit production is not executed, the blessing production is not executed either. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the original way of enjoying (hit, launch mode) such as shooting a game ball aiming at the main starting area, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, when a blessing effect is executed in the case of an irregular small hit, the player hits the game ball aiming at the sub-starting area where the entry of the game ball is not recommended, in order to generate many sub variable display games. While it is not possible to enjoy the game in the recommended original way of enjoying (how to hit, how to launch), many error notifications of how to hit (such as "Please hit left") occur. Therefore, if the blessing effect is executed in the case of an irregular small hit, the interest in the game may be reduced.

147A and 147B, in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, if the result of either the main variation display game or the sub-variation display game is a big hit result, the first
In the second period after the period, a big hit effect (big hit fanfare effect, big hit round effect, interval effect, big hit ending effect, etc.) is executed. The second period is the duration of the big hit state. The types of jackpots include jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 depending on the probability state after the jackpot and the number of rounds. For example, jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 may be a regular jackpot and a probability variation jackpot, respectively, and a 4R jackpot and a 16R jackpot (see FIG. 119). Then, different jackpot effects (one jackpot effect, two jackpot effects) may be executed for each type of jackpot.

Further, in FIGS. 147A and 147B, in the first period, which is the display time of the stop symbol, in the case where the result of one or both of the main variable display game and the sub variable display game is a disappointing result, the first period In the subsequent second period, the effect corresponding to the result of the loss is not executed. In this case, if the small hit result of one of the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game that can be in the running state at the same time (both) is forcibly stopped by the other,
The second period is at least the duration of the small hit state. In addition, when one of the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game is forcibly stopped by the big hit result,
The period is at least the duration of the big hit state. When the results of both the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game are out of alignment, the second period is a period from at least after the first period to the start of one of the variable display games.

In the examples of FIGS. 146 and 147 described above, in the case of an irregular small hit in which the sub variable display game is a small hit, a small hit fanfare effect, a small hit medium effect, and an interval effect (the large winning opening is opened and closed a plurality of times). (Only in the case), all the small hit ending effects are not executed. However, at the time of irregular small hit, small hit fanfare production, small hit medium production, interval production, and small winning ending production (which may not include blessing production) may be used during the small hit duration ( It is also possible to have a configuration such that it is executed during two periods. For example, if the small hit ending production does not include a blessing production, even an irregular small hit,
It is also possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by executing only the small hit ending production for a relatively short time to notify the small hit.

In the example of FIGS. 146 and 147, the big hit effect is executed even in the irregular big hit in which the sub-variable display game is a big hit. However, in the irregular big hit, it is also possible to configure not to perform only the blessing effect that celebrates and notifies the occurrence of the big hit among the big hit effects (the big hit effects other than the blessing effect are executed).

Incidentally, in the third embodiment, unlike the first and second embodiments, the special figure 2 starting prize memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is configured to accumulate up to a predetermined number of 1 or more (for example, 4). 2 The special figure 2 starting prize is not invalidated during execution of the variable display game or during a big hit. Therefore, the special figure starting port 2 switch process, the special figure 2 normal process, and the fluctuation start information setting process are changed from the first and second embodiments as follows.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port 2 switch process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure starting port 2 switch process (A2718) in the starting port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the number of times the starting port 2 signal is output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 37a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 (A3001). Further, the value of the loaded number of output signals of the starting port is updated by +1 (A3
002), it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A3003).

If the output count does not overflow (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the starting port 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004).
). On the other hand, when the output count overflows (result of A3003 is “Y”), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3005). If the number of reserved special figures is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A3005 is "N"), the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is ended.

When the special figure reservation number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3006) and updates the special figure 2 reservation number by +1. Yes (A3007). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved (A3008), and outputs the jackpot random numbers prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing to the jackpot random number storage area of RWM. Save to (A3009). Subsequently, a jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A3010), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3).
011). Furthermore, a small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3012). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage areas (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) corresponding to the RWM ( A3013).

Next, the game control device 100 executes special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, pre-determination processing) for determining special figure reservation information (A3014), and the decoration special figure 2 reservation number indicating the special figure 2 reservation number. A command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3015), effect command setting processing is executed (A3016), and the special figure starting port 2 switch processing ends. In this way, when the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) is generated, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

In the third embodiment, the special figure hold information determination process is also executed for the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37. Become.
Therefore, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop design command) and the pre-reading variation system command (pre-reading variation pattern command) for the special figure 2 starting memory (special figure 2 hold) is the game control device 1
00 to the effect control device 300.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 normal process according to the third embodiment.
In the special figure 2 game process, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 normal process (A3311). Note that the processes other than steps A3605a and A3605b are the same as the Toku-zu 2 normal process (FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure reserved number command (decorative special figure 2 reserved number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number as an effect command (A3605a). , Production command setting processing is executed (A3605b).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decoration special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes fluctuation start information setting processing (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. Note that step A5021,
The processes other than A5022 and A5023 are the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment (FIG. 50).
The description is omitted here.

Toku-zu 1 If information regarding the variable display game is not being set (result of A5017 is “N”),
That is, when information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 pending number is updated by -1 (A5021), and the content of the random number storage area related to the special figure 2 variable display game is shifted (A50).
22), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5023), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

[Screen transition 1]
151A and 151B are an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the third embodiment, and in the case of a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur in the normal gaming state. Show.

151A is a display screen immediately before the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game) which is the main variable display game in the normal game state is started. In the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbols “3, 4, 6” of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed in large size. Further, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbols “3, 4, 6” of the previous special figure 1 variable display game are displayed in a small size. In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is the subsidiary variable display game in the normal game state, is variably displayed.

Further, in (a), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, The second predetermined image 676 indicating the execution state of the two-variation display game has a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (is changing). The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). On the first display section 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game). Four (1 start memory display) are displayed. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "4", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4". In addition, since it is in the normal game state, left-handed display 65 for recommending left-handed play to the player
6 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Then, in (a), the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game are both in the running state. Also, the first predetermined image 675
Indicates that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “○” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It has become. The first predetermined image 675 "○" and the second predetermined image 676 "○", the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol)
May blink as.

Further, in (a), in the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a is moved to the display position of the adjacent special figure 1 hold display 620a (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 reserved display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is displayed on the first display unit 620 as the reserved digestion area 6
Move to 40 (hold shift). The special map 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a start memory display (pre-change hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game before execution, whereas the special view of the hold exhausted area 640 is displayed. The 1 hold display 620a is a start memory display (a changing hold display) corresponding to the start memory of the variable display game being executed. Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "3", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "4".

The special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is displayed in a plurality of modes (two modes) of a first display mode and a second display mode. Here, the first display mode is a display mode larger than the second display mode, and is displayed in a large size in the central portion of the display screen as a main display, and the second display mode is a sub-display as an edge of the display screen. This is a display mode in which a portion (here, the left end portion) is displayed small. That is, the fluctuating decorative design is a large design in the first display mode and a small design in the second display mode. It should be noted that the first display mode may be a mode in which a decorative pattern is formed by a character, a number, and a frame and is variably displayed, and the second display mode may be a mode in which the decorative pattern is formed by only a number and variably displayed. ..

The special figure 2 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game, is displayed as a sub-display at the right end portion of the display screen, which is smaller than the special figure 1 variable display game in the first display mode as the main display. That is, the fluctuating decorative pattern is a large symbol in the special figure 1 variable display game of the first display mode, and a small symbol in the special figure 2 variable display game. In the display mode (mode of small symbols) of the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative pattern (color and size) of the same type of mode (for example, only numbers) as the special figure 1 variable display game of the second display mode (sub display) May be different), a special design of the second display mode, a decorative pattern of the same size as the variable display game (colors and shapes may be different), or a special display of the second display mode. Although the color is different from that of the variable display game shown in FIG. 1, the decorative pattern of the same shape (size may be different) may be used. Here, the same size means that the vertical width and the horizontal width are the same, or that the points (pt) of the characters (numerals) of the decorative pattern are the same.

After that, in (C), the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, becomes the small hit result, and the small hit symbol (small hit stop symbol) "7, 6, 7" is derived and displayed on the display screen. Largely displayed as a large pattern at the top. The small hit here is a normal small hit. The small hit pattern "7, 6, 7" is first displayed in a large size in the central portion of the display screen corresponding to the first display mode (main display) of the special figure 1 variable display game, and then the small hit fanfare. It may be moved to the upper part of the display screen and displayed in a small size so as not to disturb the production. Further, the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end portion of the display screen, corresponding to the second display mode (sub display) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

Since the result of the special variation display game, which is the main variation display game, is a small hit result, the special variation 2 variation display game, which is the subsidiary variation display game, is displayed in the variation display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. The result of removal, that is, the removal pattern "1, 6, 7" is forcibly stopped (forced stop).

Further, in (c), since it is a normal small hit, a small hit fanfare effect is executed in the center portion of the display screen as a small hit effect. As a part of the small hit fanfare production, it is displayed in characters.
"Congratulations on small hits" is performed to celebrate the occurrence of the small hits. In addition,
As a blessing effect, an effect in which a character appears and celebrates may be executed. Also,
As a small hit fanfare production, "tiger mode" as a production mode corresponding to the small hit state
Entering to is notified as "Enter Tiger Mode".

And since it is a small hit state, in order to recommend the player to hit the right side, the right hit display 657
Is displayed in a large mode (first mode, maximum mode) on the upper right of the display screen, and a right-handed display 658 is displayed in a lower-right corner of the display screen in a small manner (second embodiment) different from the right-handed display 657. Mode, minimum mode). As will be described later, right-handed display 657 and right-handed display 6
58 is displayed on the display screen in the same manner even when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit result, but it may be displayed in a different manner.

It should be noted that the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.
The second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

Subsequently, in (d), a small hit medium effect is executed as a small hit effect in the central portion of the display screen. The effect in the small hit is an effect corresponding to the effect mode “tiger mode”. In addition, "tiger mode"
The mode may be set as one mode of the normal game state after the completion of the small hit, and since the mode continues, the mode name “tiger mode” may be displayed at the end or the corner of the display screen.
Although not shown, the small hit ending effect is executed at the end of the small hit state.

After that, in (e), the small hit state ends and the normal game state starts. The small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” displayed on the upper part of the display screen is returned to the central part of the display screen, enlarged and displayed large, and then starts changing. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game which is the dependent variable display game starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

In the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a is the special figure 1 hold display 62 on the left side.
It has moved to the display position of 0a (hold shift). Furthermore, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold exhaustion area 640 and displayed as a changing hold display (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of the special figure 1 hold "2", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current number of the special figure 2 hold "3".
Is displayed.

Further, in (e), the first predetermined image 675 shows that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (changing).
The second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing). First predetermined image 675 “
The “◯” and the second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). Further, since the small hit state is over and the game is in the normal game state, a left hitting display 656 for recommending left hitting to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

The following (f) is in the same state as (a) except that the number of reservations is different.

Then, in (ki), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a subsidiary variable display game, becomes the small hit result, and the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” is derived, and the variable display area at the right end of the display screen. 61
It is displayed small at 5. On the other hand, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game, becomes a small hit result, so that in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen and the variable display area 613 at the left end, the main variable display game A certain special figure 1 variable display game is disengaged result (specific result), that is, forcibly stopped by the disengagement symbol "1, 5, 6" (forced stop). In addition, the deviating symbol as the identification result of the variable display game is a symbol other than the small hit symbol and the large hit symbol,
Includes chance designs and default designs. The default design is a predetermined design ("1,
2, 3", etc.). The chance eye pattern is a special outlier pattern that can be displayed as a result of a plurality of variable display games in the continuous notice as the look-ahead effect.

Further, in (K), the deviating symbols “1, 5, 6” corresponding to the deviating result (specific result) of the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) are sub-variable display in the central portion of the display screen. game(
Special figure 2 variable display game) small hit pattern corresponding to the small hit result (first special result) "7,6
It is displayed larger than 7”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the main variation display game has resulted in a small hit. The main variable display game is frequently executed, but a small hit result (small hit pattern) that suddenly occurs in the sub variable display game that is not frequently executed
When the "" is displayed conspicuously, the player may mistakenly recognize that the main variation display game, which was displayed in a large conspicuous manner, has a small hit result. In addition, the small hit pattern has a regularity of the numbers (here, the two patterns "7" are aligned), but it is difficult to understand the difference from the off symbol, so the main variation display game is small even though it is the off symbol. It is easy to misunderstand that it was a hit.

Further, unlike (C), in (K), because of the irregular small hit, the small hit effect is not executed including the blessing effect in which the occurrence of the small hit is celebrated and notified. It should be noted that the small hit production does not include the display itself of the small hit design (small hit stop design) "7, 6, 7". Since the blessing effect is not executed due to the irregular small hit, the player enjoys the game in the recommended original way of enjoying, that is, in the left-handed or right-handed way, the way of striking the main starting area (launch mode). Like

It should be noted that the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.
The second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

And in (ki), since it is a small hit state, in order to recommend the player to hit the right side, only the right hitting display 658 is displayed in a small mode (second mode) in the lower right corner of the display screen. To be done. The right hit display 657 (first aspect) is not displayed. Further, when the small hit state due to the irregular small hit occurs in this way, the right hitting display 658 is more conspicuous than the right hitting display 657 (first mode) in the big hitting state as will be described later. It is displayed in a mode (small mode). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) that is displayed in a large size in the first display mode has a small hit and causes the player to misidentify as if a right-handed state had occurred.

Further, in the case of such an irregular small hit, a display having the same content as that in the case where the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is out of alignment is displayed on the display device (see FIG. 15 described later).
See also 2 (T) and (T). As a display of common contents, the special figure 1 hold display 620a, the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the special figure 2 hold number display 660, and the special figure 1 variable display game execution state 1st
There are a predetermined image 675 and a second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, as a display of the common contents, although not shown, there is a character that appears when the pseudo continuous effect is temporarily stopped (when the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed). In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation in which a decorative special symbol that is variably displayed is pseudo-temporarily stopped (pseudo stop display) from the start to the end of one special figure variable display game, It is an effect that is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. In addition,
In the temporary stop display, a pseudo continuous symbol that suggests continuation of the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed.

Due to the display of the above common contents, even if a small hit state occurs in the sub-variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), the player frequently appears in the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). Since the same display as when the result of () is displayed is not felt, there is less discomfort and it is less likely to be confused by the small hit state due to the sudden variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game).

Further, in (K), a special figure 1 hold display 620a, which is a starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory that is the right to execute the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game), is displayed on the display screen. Therefore, even when the result of the subsidiary variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is a small hit result, the starting memory display for the main variable display game can be continuously displayed on the display device.
For this reason, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the start-up memory display for the sub variable display game is confused by being displayed on the display device in response to the result of the sub variable display game being a small hit result.

After that, in (h), the small hit state of the irregular small hit ends and the normal game state starts. The holding shift is executed, and the deviating pattern "1, 5," displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed.
6” starts to fluctuate. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game starts in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 by the main display and the sub display. At the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game which is the dependent variable display game starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

In addition, the game control device 100, the time from the start of the irregular small hit state of (ki) in FIG. 151 to the start of the normal game state of (K) (start of the next variation) (irregular small hit digestion time). ) Is longer than the time (normal small hit digestion time = normal small hit digestion time) from the start of the normal small hit state of (c) to the start of the normal game state of (e) (start of next fluctuation) You may set it. That is, the irregular small hit digestion time=normal small hit digestion time+α. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of occurrence of an irregular small hit, which is an unintended (not recommended) small hit, by using the extra time α.

In addition, the normal small hit digestion time is the small hit fanfare time (A6003a, A
6003b), a small hit opening time (A6906, etc.), a small hit remaining ball processing time (A7006, etc.), and a small hit ending time (A7104, A7107). For example, in the case of an irregular small hit, by adding a process for saving the time α in the special figure game processing timer area in the small hit ending process (FIGS. 72 and 73), the normal small hit digestion time is added. It is possible to add the irregular time α to the irregular small hit digestion time. The normal small hitting digestion time is the time during the small hitting state, but the extra time α is the time from the end of the small hitting state to the start of the next variation.

Although the game control device 100 transmits information (a signal relating to the start of the small hit) indicating that the small hit itself has occurred to the external information terminal 71 when the irregular small hit occurs (A60).
04a, A6004b), even if two kinds of information, that is, information indicating that a small hit has occurred and information indicating that the small hit is irregular, are transmitted to the external information terminal 71 again at the extra time α. Good. For example, in the small hit ending process (FIGS. 72 and 73), by executing the process of saving the above two types of information in the external information output data area, the extra time α
At, the two types of information can be transmitted to the external information terminal 71. In this way, the information indicating that the small hit is irregular, that is, the irregular small hit is provided to the external device (such as the data display or the hall computer provided in the gaming machine 10) via the external information terminal 71. It is possible to notify that an irregular small hit, which is a small hit, has occurred by transmitting information indicating that the small hit has occurred. In the extra time α, only the information indicating that the small hit is irregular may be transmitted to the external information terminal 71.

Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number "1", and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number "2". Further, since the small hit state is over and the game is in the normal game state, a left hitting display 656 for recommending left hitting to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Subsequent (K) is in the same state as (A) and (F), only the number of holdings is different.

After that, in (K), the result of the special variation 1 variable display game, which is the main variation display game, becomes a big hit result, and the big hit symbol (big hit stop symbol) “3, 3, 3” is derived, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. Largely displayed as a large design. The big hit here is a normal big hit. In addition, the big hit symbol “3, 3, 3” is displayed small in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, corresponding to the second display mode (sub display) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

The result of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is a big hit result, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the subsidiary variable display game, loses the result, that is, the off symbol “9, 2, 6 It is forcibly stopped with "(Forced stop)."

Further, in (K), a big hit fanfare effect is executed as a big hit effect in the central portion of the display screen. As a part of the big hit fanfare production, "Congratulations on big hit!
!! ], a blessing production is performed to celebrate and notify the occurrence of the big hit. Note that the blessing effect in which the character appears and celebrates may be executed in the case of the normal small hit (c), but the blessing effect in which the character appears and celebrates is the normal small hit. It may be executed in the same manner as in the case (c) or in a different manner. It should be noted that in different modes, the distinction between the big hit and the small hit becomes clear, and in the same mode, the blessing effect becomes common and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

And since it is a big hit state, in order to recommend the right hit to the player, the right hit display 657
Is displayed in a large mode (first mode, maximum mode) on the upper right of the display screen, and a right-handed display 658 is displayed in a lower-right corner of the display screen in a small manner (second embodiment) different from the right-handed display 657. Mode, minimum mode).

Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.
The second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

Next, in (S), a big hit round effect is executed in the center of the display screen as a big hit effect.

In addition, the main variation display game of (C) and (U) of FIG. 151A described above (Special figure 1 variation display game)
In the normal small hit or normal big hit, in the variable display area 615 at the right end portion of the display screen, the dependent variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is out of pattern ("1, 6, 7""9, 2, 6 However, in the normal small hit or normal big hit of the main variable display game, the secondary variable display game should be interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the timer. In this case, although the derivation of the result of the sub variable display game is postponed, the sub variable display game in the variable display area 615 may be apparently continued due to shaking fluctuation during the small hit state or the big hit state. However, after the small hit state, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the timer is restarted for the subordinate fluctuation display game.

Similarly, in the irregular small hit of the sub variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) of (ki) in FIG. 151A, in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen and the variable display area 613 at the left end. , The main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is out of pattern ("1, 5,
6)) forcibly stops (forced stop). However, the main variable display game may be interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the timer. In this case, although the derivation of the result of the main variable display game is postponed, the main variable display game in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 613 may be apparently continued due to shaking fluctuation during the small hit state. In addition, after the small hit state, the measurement of the variation time by the timer is restarted for the main variation display game.

As the first display mode of the main variable display game during the interruption (during the small hit state of the sub variable display game) in the variable display area 610, a mode in which a swing fluctuation (temporary stop) is performed with a large symbol, or a large symbol is used. Although there is a mode in which the rotation is changed, scrolling before the interruption (fluctuation in the vertical direction of the display screen) may be continuously performed during the interruption. As a second display mode of the main variable display game during the interruption (during the small hit state of the subordinate variation display game) in the variable display area 613, there is a mode in which the swing variation and the rotation variation are performed by the small symbol, but the interruption is performed. The previous scrolling mode may be continuously performed during the interruption.

Note that, in the first specific game state and the third specific game state of FIG. 116, even when a normal small hit and an irregular small hit occur, it is basically the same as in FIGS. 151A and 151B, and the main fluctuation display The special figure 1 variable display game which is a game is displayed in two modes: a first display mode (main display) of the variable display region 610 and a second display mode (sub display) of the variable display region 613.
In the special figure 2 variable display game which is a sub variable display game, the variable display area 615 at the end of the display screen is displayed.
Is displayed. In the first specific game state and the third specific game state, since the normal electric winning port of the normal variation winning device 33 is the main starting area, the ball enters the first starting winning opening 36 (sub-starting area). When the special display 1 variable display game executed based on is also a small hit, it is an irregular small hit, but in that case, the small hit effect (including the blessing effect) is not executed. For example, (U)(
In the case of (d), assuming that such an irregular small hit is not a normal small hit, the character display “tiger mode entry”, “small hit congratulations”, “tiger mode”, or a large right-handed display 657 is not displayed. The small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" in the main display may not be displayed.

[Another example 1 for irregular small hits]
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing another example 1 of irregular small hits.

152 (ta) is a continuation of FIG. 151A (f) and is a main variation display game
The result of the variable display game is the result of deviation, and the deviation pattern “8, 4, 3” is displayed in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen. Further, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbol "8, 4, 3" of the special figure 1 variable display game is also displayed small. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “×” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.
The second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. The second predetermined image 676 “◯” may blink as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Subsequently, (H) is the same as (A) of FIG. 151A except that the number of reservations is different. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number "1" of the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 is
Displays the current number "3" of the special figure 2 reservations.

After that, in (T), the result of the special variation 1 variable display game, which is the main variation display game, becomes a deviation result, and the deviation pattern “2, 5, 1” is displayed in the fluctuation display area 610 at the center of the display screen. Has been done. Also, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the out-of-stop symbol “2, 5, 1” of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed small. Others are the same as in (T).

Subsequently, (TE) is the same as (H), except that the number of holdings is different. Special map 1 Hold number display 65
0 indicates the number "0" of the current special map 1 reservation, and the special figure 2 reservation number display 660 indicates the current special map 2
Displays the number of holds "3".

After that, in (g), an irregular small hit occurs similarly to (g) in FIG. 151B.
(G) is the same as (G) except that the number of reservations is different.

Next, in (na), the small hit state of the irregular small hit ends and the normal game state starts. However, since the current number of special figure 1 suspension is “0”, unlike the case of (H) in FIG. 151B, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 61.
3 does not start, and the outlier symbol "1, 5, 6" remains stopped and displayed at the center and left end of the display screen. However, the special figure 2 variable display game which is the sub variable display game starts in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen.

Further, the special figure 1 pending number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 pending number “0”, and the special figure 2 pending number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 pending number “2”. Further, since the small hit state is over and the game is in the normal game state, a left hitting display 656 for recommending left hitting to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

Note that, similarly to the above and FIG. 151, the game control device 100 is from the start of the irregular small hit state of (g) of FIG. 152 to the start of the normal game state of (na) (start of the next variation). Time (irregular small hit digestion time), the time from the start of the normal small hit state of (c) of FIG. 151 to the start of the normal game state of (e) (start of the next change) (that is, normal small hit) It may be set longer than the hit digestion time and the normal small hit digestion time). That is, the irregular small hit digestion time=normal small hit digestion time+α. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of occurrence of an irregular small hit, which is an unintended (not recommended) small hit, by using the extra time α.

[Another example of irregular small hits 2]
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing another example 2 of irregular small hits. Another example 2 of irregular small hits corresponds to a case where (ki) in FIG. 151B is replaced with (ki-1) to (ki-4) in FIG. 153.

153 (ki-1) of FIG. 153 is the same as (ki) of FIG. 151B, but the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is the small hit result, and the small hit symbol "7, 6," 7” is derived and is displayed small in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. On the other hand, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) becomes the small hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is displayed in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. Detachment result (specification result), that is, forcibly stopped by the small detachment pattern "1, 5, 6" in the sub display (second display mode) (forced stop). In the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the result of deviation (specific result) of the special figure 1 variable display game, that is, the large deviation pattern “1, 5, 6” in the main display (first display mode) Is not displayed.

As described above, when the result of the sub-variable display game is an irregular small hit that results in a small hit, the main variable display game is terminated and the main variable display game is set as the disengagement result, and the disparity result is displayed in the first display mode. It is not displayed in the (large mode) but is displayed on the display screen in the second display mode (small mode). Therefore, in the case of irregular small hits, there is no erroneous recognition that the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) that is largely displayed in the main display has a small hit result.

The main variable display game is frequently executed, while the sub variable display game is rarely executed and is changed for a long time, so that a small hit is rare. Since it is difficult to understand the difference between the small hitting design and the falling design, it is easy to mistakenly recognize that the main variation display game has become the small winning even though it is the falling design. Therefore, in the case of irregular small hits, the player may mistakenly recognize that the main variation display game, which was displayed in a large and conspicuous manner, resulted in a small hit.

The main variable display game may be interrupted by the irregular small hit by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the timer. As a mode (second display mode) of the main fluctuation display game of (medium), a mode of swinging fluctuation (temporary stop) with a small symbol, a mode of rotating with a small symbol, or the same scroll as before apparent interruption is performed. There are modes and the like.

Subsequently, (ki-2) is a display screen when the small hit state of the irregular small hit ends and the normal game state starts. A left hit display 656 for recommending left hits to the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. In addition, the fusible hidden images 651a and 65 that can hide other images.
1b appears while moving so as to close.

Further, as the hold shift is executed, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number 1 of the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold. The number "2" is displayed. Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It is a symbol "○" indicating that.

It should be noted that the small small hit pattern “7, 6, 7” at the right end portion of the display screen and the small outlying pattern “1, 5, 6” at the left end portion are preferentially higher than the concealed images 651a and 651b in the upper layer (front side). )
The concealed images 651a and 651b are displayed as, and the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" deviates from the symbol "7, 6, 7".
1, 5, 6" is not concealed, but may be concealed. Also, the hidden images 651a, 6
51b is a special figure 1 reserved display 620a, a reserved digestion area 640 (including a changing pending display), a special figure 1 reserved number display 650, a special figure 2 reserved number display 660, a first predetermined image 675, and a second predetermined image 67.
Although 6 is not hidden, any one or a plurality of these may be hidden.

Then, in (Ki-3) immediately after, the sliding door-shaped hidden images 651a and 651b are completely closed,
The two hidden images 651a and 651b are in contact with each other. Further, in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is changed in the sub display (second display mode). In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the subsidiary variable display game, changes in a small manner.

Note that the sliding-screen hidden images 651a and 651b are preferentially displayed on the upper layer (front side), and the special display 1 variable display game of the main display is displayed on the lower layer (rear side). -Shaped concealment images 651a and 651b conceal the special display 1 variable display game in the main display (concealment effect). Therefore, in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game is not displayed in the main display (first display mode).
Since it is inconspicuous, it is not necessary to hide the special figure 1 variable display game (sub-display) in the left end variable display area 613 and the special figure 2 variable display game in the right end variable display area 615.

Subsequently, in (Ki-4) immediately after, the sliding door-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are opened and displayed at intervals, and the special display 1 variable display of the main display is made from the gap between the two concealed images 651a and 651b. A part of the game is displayed and can be seen. As a part of the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation display of the middle symbol “5” of the outlier symbols “1, 5, 6” that have started variation is displayed.

After that, (K) in FIG. 153 is the same as (151) in FIG. 151B, but the fusible hidden image 6 is displayed.
51a and 651b are completely opened and erased. Then, all of the special display 1 variable display game of the main display is displayed and can be visually recognized.

In addition, when the variation starts suddenly from (K-1) like (H), the off symbol "1, 5, 6" of the main display appears suddenly and the variation starts, so that the player feels uncomfortable. .. However, in (ki-2) to (ki-4) of FIG. 153, after the end of the small hit state due to the irregular small hit, the sliding-screen-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are the special display 1 of the main display immediately after the start.
By executing the concealment effect that conceals the variable display game, the player's discomfort is reduced.

Further, in (ki-1), a predetermined image may be displayed before the sliding-screen hidden images 651a and 651b are displayed. For example, the predetermined image is a character image (for example, “Irregular!” or the like) notifying that it is an irregular small hit, or a normal game (special figure variation display game).
May be displayed, that is, a character image (for example, "please wait a little!") indicating that the progress of the normal game is delayed due to the occurrence of a small hit may be displayed. Even in this case, the player's discomfort is reduced.

[Another example 3 of irregular small hits (switching effect 1)]
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing another example 3 (switching effect 1) of irregular small hit. Another example 3 of irregular small hits is (key-1) to (ki-4) of FIG. 153, and (key-a) of FIG. 154.
To (key d).

154 (key-a) is the same as (ki) in FIG. 151B and (ki-1) in FIG. 153, but unlike (ki) (ki-1), the main display is displayed at the center of the display screen. As the (first display mode), the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is displayed large. Further, in addition to the right hitting display 658 in the small aspect (second aspect) of the lower right corner of the display screen, it corresponds to the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” displayed in the large central part of the display screen. Then, the right-handed display 657 in the large mode (first mode, maximum mode) is displayed in the upper right of the display screen.

Subsequently, (key-b) is the same as (key-2) in FIG. 153, but different from (key-2),
The sliding door-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b that appear while moving to be closed conceal the large small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" in the main display (first display mode).

Subsequently, (key-c) immediately after is the same as (key-3) in FIG. 153, but the main display (first display mode) is small due to the completely closed fusid-shaped hidden images 651a and 651b. Hit pattern "
"7, 6, 7" is completely hidden.

Subsequently, in the immediately following (key d), the sliding-screen-shaped concealed images 651a and 651b are opened and displayed at intervals, and the special display 1 variable display of the main display is made from the gap between the two concealed images 651a and 651b. A part of the game is displayed and can be seen. Here, as a part of the special display 1 variable display game of the main display, out of the outlier symbols “1, 5, 6” that have started to change,
The variable display of the middle symbol “5” is displayed.

In addition, when the fluctuation starts suddenly from (key a) like (h), a big small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” of the main display of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) suddenly appears. The special display 1 variable display game (main variable display game) changes to the out-of-display symbol “1, 5, 6” to start the variation, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable. However, in (key-b) to (key-d) of FIG. 154, after the short hit state due to the irregular short hit, the sliding-shaped hidden images 651a and 651b are changed to the special figure 1 of the main display immediately after the start. By executing the concealment effect for concealing the display game, the player's discomfort is reduced.

In addition, this concealment effect is a deviation symbol "1, 5, 6" as a deviation result (specific result) of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) and a special figure 2 variable display game (sub variable display game). ) Is a switching effect (switching effect 1) for switching and displaying the small hit symbol “7, 6, 7” as the small hit result (first special result) on the display screen. In the case of irregular small hits, it is possible to switch from the small hit result of the subsidiary variable display game to the outlier result of the main variable display game and start the main variable display game by the switching effect, so there is continuity of display and less discomfort. Become.

[Another example of irregular small hits 4 (switching effect 2)]
FIG. 155 is a diagram showing another example 4 (switching effect 2) of irregular small hits. Another example 4 of irregular small hits corresponds to a case where (K) in FIG. 151B is replaced with (K-1) to (K-5) in FIG. 155.

In (ki) of FIG. 155, a small hit state occurs due to an irregular small hit.

In (K-1) of FIG. 155, the first switching effect is executed immediately after the small hit state occurs.
The first switching effect is the special display 1 variation display game (main variation display game) main display off symbol "1, 5, 6", the special figure 2 variation display game (subordinate variation display game) small hit symbol " 7,
Switch to "6, 7" to display the main display.

In (H-1), the effect control device 300, the special figure 1 reserved display 620a and its reserved digestion area 640, and the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) outlier symbol 655a "1,
5, 6” is attached so as to be attached to one side surface 652a of a rectangular parallelepiped object which is a 3D object (stereoscopic object), and is displayed on the display screen by the perspective method. Also,
The effect control device 300, the special figure 2 hold display 630a and its hold digestion area 640, and the small hit pattern 655b “7,6,7” of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is a side surface of the rectangular parallelepiped object. It is added so as to be attached to the side surface 652b on the right side of 652a and displayed on the display screen by the perspective method. The upper and lower surfaces of a rectangular parallelepiped of the rectangular parallelepiped object are squares, and the four sides are the same rectangle. Further, the rectangular parallelepiped object is drawn by the two-point perspective drawing as a perspective method.

Then, the effect control device 300 displays the rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the positive direction around the vertical center axis of the rectangular parallelepiped. First, the out-of-sync pattern 655a "1, 5, 6
Only the side surface 652a of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only “” can be visually recognized, but the rectangular parallelepiped object is rotated so that the side surface 652a moves to the left back side (rotation in the forward direction). When the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate, the small hit pattern 655b “7, 6, 7” on the side surface 652b is displayed, and finally, the small hit pattern 655b “7”.
, 6, 7” are only displayed so that only the side surface 652b is displayed. In this way, by using the rotation display of the 3D object by the first switching effect, the detachment pattern 655a “1
, 5, 6” is switched to the small hit symbol 655b “7, 6, 7”.

In addition, the first switching effect is, as in (K-1), the stop state of the decorative symbol (the deviating symbol "1,5,6" during the stop and the small hit symbol "7,6,7" during the stop) It is not necessary to be executed in the state), and may be executed during the fluctuation immediately before the decoration pattern stops. In this case, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variation display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variation display game) that are changing are executed within the side surface 652a and the side surface 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object, respectively. Then, as the side surface 652a and the side surface 652b move due to the rotation of the rectangular parallelepiped object, the display position of the variable display (variable display area) also moves.

Further, in the right-handed state (small hitting state) where (K-1) is recommended to be right-handed, when the player hits left, the right-handed display 657 for returning the way of hitting to the right is large (first 1 aspect) is displayed on the display screen. In that case, the right-handed display 657 may be additionally displayed so as to be attached to the surface (side surfaces 652a, 652b) of the rectangular parallelepiped object, or may be displayed outside the side surfaces 652a, 652b regardless of the rectangular parallelepiped object. May be displayed in. When the display is separated from the side surfaces 652a and 652b, the right-handed display 657 has a part of the side surface 652.
It may be displayed outside the display areas of a and 652b, and the other part may be overlapped and displayed on the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b so as to extend over both the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b.

As described above, the irregular small hit causes the main variable display game to be interrupted by interrupting the measurement (clocking) of the variable time by the timer (the derivation of the result of the main variable display game is postponed). Alternatively, the main variable display game being suspended may be displayed as a specific mode in which it is attached to the side surface 652a. Specific modes of the main fluctuation display game include a mode in which swing fluctuation (temporary stop) is performed in the side surface 652a, and a mode in which the straight side or curved scroll moves in the side surface 652a. In addition, after the small hit state, the measurement of the variation time (timekeeping) by the timer is restarted for the main variation display game,
The main variation display game is restarted.

Subsequently, in (K-2), in the small hit state after the end of the first switching effect, the small hit symbols “7, 6, 7” of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) are mainly displayed ( It is displayed in the first display mode). Further, in the second display portion 630, the special figure 2 hold display 630a (special figure 2 start memory display) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. Is displayed. Nothing is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. Further, a right hit display 657 and a right hit display 658 are displayed.

After that, in (K-3), when the fluctuations of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are about to start in the normal game state immediately after the end of the small hit state, the right hit display 657 is displayed.
The right-handed display 658 disappears and the left-handed display 656 is displayed.

Subsequently, in (H-4), the second switching effect is executed while the fluctuations of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are started. In the second switching effect, the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" of the special map 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is out of the main display of the special map 1 variable display game (main variable display game) Switch to 1, 5, 6” to display the main display. Note that the second switching effect may be performed during the small hit state instead of the normal game state after the small hit state.

In the second switching effect, the effect control device 300 displays the aforementioned rectangular parallelepiped object so as to rotate in the opposite direction to the first switching effect around the central axis of the rectangular parallelepiped in the vertical direction. Initially, only the side surface 652b of the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed so that only the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" can be visually recognized, but the rectangular parallelepiped object is rotated so that the side surface 652b moves to the right back side. Do (rotate in the opposite direction). When the rectangular parallelepiped object is displayed to rotate, the small hit pattern 655a "1, 5, 6" on the side surface 652a is displayed, and finally, only the small hit pattern 655a "1, 5, 6" is visually recognized. Sides 652 to allow
Only a is displayed. In this manner, the small switching symbol 655b “7, 6, 7” is removed by using the rotation display of the 3D object by the second switching effect, and the symbol 655a “1, 5, 6” is removed.
It is switched to.

It should be noted that the second switching effect does not need to be executed during the change of the decorative design as in (K-4), and the stopped state of the decorative design before the start of the change (the detached pattern "1, 5, 6 during the stop") ] And the small hitting symbols “7, 6, 7” which are stopped) may be executed. In this case, the stop display (stop pattern) of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (sub variable display game) are respectively the side surface 652a and the side surface 65 due to the rotation of the rectangular parallelepiped object.
The display position moves as 2b moves.

In addition, in the left-handed state (normal game state) in which (K-4) left-handedness is recommended, when the player makes a right-handed hit, in addition to the left-handed hit display 656, the left-handed hit is returned. The hit display is displayed on the display screen in a large manner. For example, a left-handed display in a large mode is a right-handed display 657
The character of may be changed to "left-handed" and the direction of the arrow may be reversed. In that case, the left-handed display is
The rectangular parallelepiped object may be additionally displayed so as to be attached to the surface (side surfaces 652a and 652b) or may be displayed on the display screen outside the side surfaces 652a and 652b regardless of the rectangular parallelepiped object. When the left-handed display is displayed off the side surfaces 652a and 652b, a part of the left-handed display is displayed outside the display area of the side surfaces 652a and 652b, and the other part is displayed on the side surface 652.
The display areas may be overlapped with the display areas of the side surfaces 652a and 652b so as to extend over both the display areas of a and 652b.

In addition, the production control device 300 adds the special figure 1 reserved display 620a and its reserved digestion area 640 to the side surface 652a, and adds the special figure 2 reserved display 630a and its reservation digestion area 640 to the side surface 652.
It is added to b and displayed on the display screen by the perspective method (two-point perspective drawing method).

After that, in (Ku 5), the rectangular parallelepiped object disappears, and similarly to (K), in the special display 1 variable display game which is the main variable display game, the variable display area 6 is displayed by the main display and the sub display.
10 and the variable display area 613.

As described above, in the case of irregular small hits, the first switching effect is used to derive the deviation result of the main variation display game in the main display, and then the small variation result (first special result) of the subsidiary variation display game is obtained. It can be switched and displayed. Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in a large and conspicuous manner resulted in a small hit result. Further, by the second switching effect, in the main display, it is possible to switch from the small hit result of the subsidiary variable display game to the outlier result of the main variable display game, and the main variable display game can be started, so that the small hit state (ki) and the normal game There is continuity of display with the state (Cou 5), and discomfort is reduced.

As described above, at the time of transition from (K-3) to (K-4), the next fluctuation has already started, but not after the start of the next fluctuation, during the small hit digestion time (here Then, the second switching effect may be executed during the irregular small hit digestion time). By doing so, the game progresses smoothly. In addition, by doing so, the second switching effect makes the effect slightly different from the normal small hit state (normal small hit state), making it easier to recognize that it is an irregular small hit, and in the effect control device 300. It leads to the reduction of the load of the image processing (the stopped decorative design is lighter in the image processing of the second switching effect than the fluctuating decorative design)
..

Further, in (h-1) and (h-4), the side surfaces 652a, 6 which are the divided display areas.
When the emphasis effect for emphasizing 52b is executed, the side surfaces 652a and 652b that are visually recognized as tilted to the back side by the perspective method become easy to understand. Side surfaces 652a and 652b are used as an emphasis effect.
The edges of the image to be illuminated or displayed in a special color (gold), and the side surfaces 652a and 652b.
The effect image is displayed around.

In addition, in (H-1) and (H-4), by displaying a predetermined image (eg, an arrow, a ball, etc.) on the display screen or operating a movable accessory, a side surface 652a which is a partitioned display region. , 65
The special figure 1 hold display 620a or the special figure 2 hold display 630a of 2b may be subjected to an action effect such that a predetermined image or a character object is made to act. Then, the special map 1 hold display 620a and the special map 2 hold display 6
Corresponding to the action effect on 30a, a hold change effect in which the mode (color or the like) of the hold display of the object of the effect effect changes from the normal mode may be executed. The holding change effect (holding change notice) here may be performed after the holding is generated, not when the holding is generated. The predetermined image may be displayed in the side surfaces 652a and 652b, which are partitioned display areas (partitioned areas), or the side surface 65.
2a and 652b may be displayed across the divided area, or a part of the side surfaces 652a and 652 may be displayed.
It may be displayed within the partitioned area of 2b and another part may be displayed outside the partitioned area.

In addition, when the mode of the special figure 1 hold display 620a is changed by the hold change effect (hold change change notice) during the (K-1) first switching effect, the change also occurs in the (K-4) second switching effect. The special figure 1 hold display 620a in the above mode is displayed. That is, in (H-1) to (H-4), the changed special figure 1 hold display 620a is maintained in the changed mode. Similarly,
Even when the mode of the special figure 2 hold display 630a changes from the normal mode in (H-1), (
From (1) to (4), the changed mode of the special figure 2 suspension display 630a that has once changed is maintained. As described above, since the once-changed hold display does not return to the original normal state before the change, the player does not erroneously recognize that the hold change is down-ranked, and the interest of the game is not deteriorated.

In addition, when the mode of the special figure 1 hold display 620a is changed by the hold change effect (hold change change notice) during the (K-1) first switch effect, the (K-4) second switch effect is started. It is also possible to return the special figure 1 hold display 620a to the normal mode at the start of the first or second switching effect. With this configuration, especially when the special figure 2 hold display 630a is changed to a hold due to a big hit, the special figure 1 hold display 620a is the normal mode in the second switching effect of (K-4). It becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the hold display 630a in FIG.

[Screen transition 2]
156A and 156B is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the third embodiment, and is normal in the small hit RUSH state (second specific game state of FIG. 116). The case where small hits and irregular small hits occur is shown.

(A) to () of FIG. 156A correspond to (A) to (F) of FIG. 151A, and (K) to (F) of FIG. 156B.
(S) corresponds to (K) to (S) in FIG. 151B, but in the small hit RUSH state, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game and the sub variable display game becomes the special figure 1 variable display game. , It is the opposite of the normal game state.

Therefore, in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 156, unlike (a) to (sa) of FIG. 151,
The main display of the main variable display game is not the special figure 1 variable display game but the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 hold display 630a and its hold are not the special figure 1 hold display 620a and its holding exhaustion area 640. The digestion area 640 is displayed on the display screen (second display unit 630). In addition, in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 156, the numbers of reservations displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 660 are the same as those in (a) to (sa) of FIG. 151. It has been replaced.

In addition, in (a) to (a) of FIG. 156, the right hit display 658 is always displayed through the small hit RUSH state, the small hit state, and the big hit state.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
In this modified example, unlike the above, not only the irregular small hit, but also the normal small hit that occurs from the normal game state, the small hit effect is not executed, and the blessing effect that is performed as part of the small hit effect Not executed

In the hit command processing of FIG. 157, step B21 of the hit command processing of FIG.
02, B2106, B2110, B2114, steps B2102a, B2106a,
It is replaced with B2110a and B2114a. Then, steps B2102a and B
At 2106a, B2110a, and B2114a, it is determined whether or not it is an irregular small hit or a small hit from the normal gaming state, and when the judgment is "Y", fanfare effect setting processing (B2103), round effect. The setting process (B2107), the interval effect setting process (B2111), and the ending effect setting process (B2115) are not executed.

FIG. 158A is a table exemplifying the presence or absence of a small hit effect and a big hit effect by the hit system command processing with respect to the normal game state (left hit state). Unlike FIG. 147A, even if the result of the main variation display game is a small hit result in the first period (normal small hit), a small hit effect (including a blessing effect) in the second period after the first period. Does not run.

On the other hand, in the small hit RUSH state (right hitting state) of FIG. 158B, as in the case of FIG. 147B, in the first period, when the result of the main variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is the small hit result (normal small In the case of a hit), a small hit effect is executed in the second period after the first period.

158A and 158B, in the case of irregular small hit, the small hit effect is not executed, as in FIGS. 147A and 147B.

FIG. 159 is a screen transition diagram according to the present modification, in which only (C) and (D) in FIG. 151A are replaced with (C-1). In (C-1), a normal small hit (small hit in the special display 1 variable display game) has occurred from the normal game state, but a small hit effect such as a small hit fanfare effect or a small hit medium effect is not executed. In (C-1), during the small hit state, the small hit symbol "7, 6, 7" of the special figure 1 variable display game is largely displayed in the first display mode (main display) in the central portion of the display screen. It is just Note that the large right-handed display 657 may or may not be displayed.

As described above, in the modified example, the result of the main variation display game is the small hit result in the small hit RUSH state (second gaming state), so that a blessing effect is produced when the small hit state occurs from the small hit RUSH state. To execute. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (first gaming state), the result of the main variation display game is the small hit result, so that the blessing effect is not executed when the small hit state occurs from the normal gaming state.

Thus, by not performing the blessing effect when the small hit state occurs from the normal game state, the blessing effect when the small hit state occurs from the small hit RUSH state can be impressed to the player. Depending on the state, you can add sharpness to the performance. In particular, since the small hit RUSH state is more profitable for the player than the normal game state, the small hit RU state
It can be emphasized that the SH state is a gaming state that benefits the player.

[Operation and effect of the third embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening 36
) Or a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening 37).
It is possible to generate a special game state (for example, a small hit state, a big hit state) advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result by providing a display control means (display control device 300) capable of displaying Is. Then, in the gaming machine 10, entering a game ball into the first starting area is recommended, the first starting area becomes the main area (main starting area), and the second starting area becomes the sub area (sub starting area). It is recommended that the first game state (for example, normal game state, left hit state) and game ball enter the second starting area, the second starting area becomes the main area, and the first starting area becomes It is possible to generate a second game state (for example, a small hit RUSH state, a right hitting state) that is a sub-region. The production control means (production control device 300) can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the sub variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area. It is feasible. Furthermore, when the result of the main variation display game becomes the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) occurs, the effect control means (effect control device 300). In the case where the first special game state occurs when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result while the blessing effect of blessing and informing the occurrence of the first special game state is executed. , The blessing effect of blessing and informing the occurrence of the first special game state is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the result of the main variation display game is the first special result (
For example, only in the case of a normal small hit), a blessing effect for blessing and informing the occurrence of the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in the original way of playing (how to hit), and the enjoyment of the game is improved. The result of the sub variable display game is the first
When a blessing effect is executed when a special result is obtained (for example, in the case of an irregular small hit), the player tries to generate a large number of dependent variable display games and aims at a starting area where entering a game ball is not recommended. Since the game ball is launched, it becomes impossible to enjoy the game in the original way of enjoyment, and a lot of error notifications of how to play occur.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the first special game state to occur when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result (for example, irregular small hit). In the case of), the result of the main variable display game is the same as the case (for example, the case of deviating) other than the first special result (for example, the small hit result) and the second special result (for example, the big hit result) different from the first special result. The display of the contents of is displayed on the display device 41.

Therefore, even when the first special game state occurs due to the sub variable display game (for example, in the case of irregular small hits), the result of the main variable display game is a result other than the special result (including a chance eye symbol and a default symbol). ) And the display of common contents (for example, special figure 1
The hold display 620a, the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the special figure 2 hold number display 660, etc.) can be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the first special game state ((for example,
Even if (a small hit state due to an irregular small hit) occurs, the player does not feel uncomfortable because he/she sees on the display device 41 the same display as the result of the main variation display game that is frequently displayed. It is less likely to be confused in the first special game state due to the secondary variable display game that suddenly occurred.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means, in the case where the first special game state (for example, a small hit state due to a normal small hit) occurs due to the result of the main variation display game being the first special result, When the first special game state occurs from the second game state (for example, small hit RUSH state), the blessing effect is executed, but the first special game state occurs from the first game state (for example, normal game state). If you do, do not perform the blessing rendition.

Therefore, when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) occurs from the first game state (for example, a normal game state), the blessing effect is not executed, so that the second game state (for example, a small hit RUSH state) The blessing effect when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state) occurs can be impressed on the player, and the effect can be sharpened according to the game state. In particular, when the second game state is more profitable to the player than the first game state, it can be emphasized that the second game state is a game state in which the player is profitable.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can bring both the main variation display game and the subsidiary variation display game into a running state. Therefore, the time for digesting the variable display game is increased and the time efficiency is improved. If the sub variable display game (or the main variable display game) is started after waiting for the end of the main variable display game (or the sub variable display game), the time for digesting the variable display game increases and the time efficiency increases. Deteriorate.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means displays the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area more than the subsidiary variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the secondary area. When the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can be in a state of being executed, and the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, In the case of a regular small hit), the main variable display game is ended and the main variable display game is set as a specific result, and the specific result (for example, a falling result) is the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the sub variable display game. Display larger than.

Therefore, when the result of the sub-variable display game is the first special result, the main variable display game is terminated and the specific result (for example, the disengagement result) of the main variable display game is set to the first special result of the sub-variable display game ( For example, if it is displayed larger than the (small hit result), it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistaken recognition that the main variation display game has the first special result. Although the main variation display game is frequently executed, if the first special result (for example, the small hit result) that suddenly occurs in the sub-variation display game that is not frequently executed is conspicuously displayed, it is displayed in a large conspicuous manner. There is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that the main variation display game that had been used had the first special result.

According to the third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a start storage means capable of storing a start memory that is the right to execute the main variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area. When the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hit), the effect control means displays the start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is the right to execute the main variable display game. It can be displayed on the device 41.

Therefore, even when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, the small hit result), the start memory display for the main variable display game can be continuously displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the start memory display for the sub variable display game is displayed on the display device 41 and is confused when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result (for example, a small hit result). it can.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means causes the result of the main variation display game or the sub-variation display game to be a second special result (for example, a big hit result) different from the first special result (for example, a small hit result). When a special game state of 2 (for example, a big hit state) occurs, a display (for example, right-handed display 657) for recommending the player to enter a game ball into the second starting area is displayed in the first mode (
For example, it is displayed in a large mode, and the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result.
When a special game state occurs (for example, in the case of irregular small hits), a first display (for example, a right-handed display 658) for recommending the player to enter the game ball into the second starting area is displayed first. The second mode (for example, a small mode) different from the above mode is displayed.

Therefore, when the first special game state (for example, a small hit state due to irregular small hits) occurs due to the result of the sub variable display game being the first special result, the second special game state (for example, the big hit state). In a mode (for example, a small mode) that is less conspicuous than the first mode (for example, a large mode) in ), a display (for example, a right-handed display) for recommending the player to enter the game ball into the second starting area. Can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether the main variation display game displayed in a large size has the first special result (for example, a small hit result).

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the sub variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area. The game can be executed, and the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can both be in the running state, and the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result). In such a case, the main variable display game is ended, the main variable display game is set as a specific result (for example, a result of the deviation), and the specific result of the main variable display game and the first special result of the sub variable display game are displayed. The switching effect to be switched and displayed at is executed.

Therefore, when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of an irregular small hit), the specific result (for example, the deviating result) of the main variable display game is derived by the switching effect and then the sub result is obtained. It is possible to switch to and display the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the variable display game. For this reason, the player is not erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in a large and conspicuous manner had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). In addition, by the switching effect, the main variation display game can be started by switching from the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the subsidiary variation display game to the specific result (for example, a defeat result) of the main variation display game, so that continuous display of the display is possible. There is less discomfort.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means can execute the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the subsidiary variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the subsidiary area. Can be executed, and the main variable display game and the sub variable display game can both be in a running state, and when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result, the main variable display game is displayed. The game is interrupted to set the main variable display game as a specific mode, and a switching effect is displayed in which the specific mode of the main variable display game and the first special result of the sub variable display game are switched and displayed on the display device.

Therefore, when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, in the case of irregular small hit), the main variation display game is interrupted by the switching effect and the main variation display game is specified in a specific mode (for example, , A fluctuation that is different from that before the interruption) such as a fluctuation, and can be displayed by switching to the first special result (for example, a small hit result) of the sub variable display game. For this reason, the player is not erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in a large and conspicuous manner had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). Also, by the switching effect, the first special result of the sub-variable display game (for example, a small hit result) is switched to a specific mode of the main variable display game,
Since the main variable display game can be started, there is continuity of display and the sense of discomfort is reduced.

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means, the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main region, the first display mode (for example, large display mode) and the second display mode (for example, small display mode). It is possible to display on the display device 41 in two modes. Further, the effect control means is capable of displaying a subsidiary variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the subsidiary area on the display device, and is executing both the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game. It can be in a state. When the result of the subsidiary variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variable display game is ended and the main variable display game is set as a specific result (for example, a result of failure). It is not displayed in the 1st display mode, but is displayed on the display device 41 in the 2nd display mode.

Therefore, when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, the small hit result),
The main variation display game is ended, and the specific result (for example, the off result) of the main variation display game is displayed only in the second display mode (for example, the small display mode) and is not displayed in the first display mode (for example, the large display mode). .. Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). Also,
When the sub-variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-region can be displayed on the display device 41 smaller than the main variation display game in the first display mode, the main variation display is displayed in the large first display mode. The player is not erroneously recognized as if the game had the first special result (for example, a small hit result).

According to the third embodiment, the effect control means, the main variation display game based on the entry of the game ball into the main region, the first display mode (for example, large display mode) and the second display mode (for example, small display mode). It is possible to display on the display device 41 in two modes. Further, the effect control means is capable of displaying a subsidiary variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the subsidiary area on the display device, and is executing both the main variable display game and the subsidiary variable display game. It can be in a state. When the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, a small hit result), the main variable display game is interrupted and is not displayed in the first display mode, but is displayed on the display device 41 in the second display mode. To do.

Therefore, when the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result (for example, the small hit result),
While the main variable display game is interrupted, it is displayed only in the second display mode (for example, a small display mode) and not displayed in the first display mode (for example, a large display mode). Therefore, the player will not be erroneously recognized as if the main variation display game displayed in the first display mode had the first special result (for example, a small hit result). Further, if the sub-variable display game based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-region can be displayed on the display device 41 smaller than the main variable display game in the first display mode, the main display in the large first display mode is performed. The player is not erroneously recognized as if the variable display game had the first special result (for example, a small hit result).

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 2nd starting prize hole (2nd starting prize area)
38 1st special variation winning device 39 2nd special variation winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board production device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area or the second starting area, the display device is provided with effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when is a special result,
A first game state in which a game ball is recommended to enter the first starting area, the first starting area serves as a main area, and the second starting area serves as a subsidiary area,
It is possible to generate a second game state in which a game ball is recommended to enter the second starting area, the second starting area serves as a main area, and the first starting area serves as a sub area.
The effect control means,
The main variation display game can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the sub variation display game can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area.
It is possible to bring both the main variable display game and the sub variable display game into a running state,
When the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result, the main variable display game is ended and the main variable display game is set as the specific result, and the specific result of the main variable display game and the sub variable display are set. Executing a switching effect of switching and displaying the first special result of the game on the display device,
A gaming machine characterized by not performing a blessing effect for blessing and informing the occurrence of a first special game state that occurs when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting area or the second starting area, the display device is provided with effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when is a special result,
A first game state in which a game ball is recommended to enter the first starting area, the first starting area serves as a main area, and the second starting area serves as a subsidiary area,
It is possible to generate a second game state in which a game ball is recommended to enter the second starting area, the second starting area serves as a main area, and the first starting area serves as a sub area.
The effect control means,
The main variation display game can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main area, and the sub variation display game can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub area.
It is possible to bring both the main variable display game and the sub variable display game into a running state,
When the result of the sub variable display game is the first special result, the main variable display game is interrupted to set the main variable display game as a specific mode, and the specific mode of the main variable display game and the sub variable display Executing a switching effect of switching and displaying the first special result of the game on the display device,
A gaming machine characterized by not performing a blessing effect for blessing and informing the occurrence of a first special game state that occurs when the result of the sub variable display game becomes the first special result.

Images